JP7364247B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won on the condition that a game ball enters a starting hole. When a jackpot determination is made, a variable display of identification information (special symbol) to notify the jackpot determination result is performed. When a jackpot is announced by the variable display of identification information (special symbols), a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is entered (see Patent Document 1).

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the time required for identification information (special symbols) is determined based on the gaming state.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-172741

However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner in order to improve gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
comprising game execution means for executing a specific game advantageous to the player when a specific result is derived from the variable display of the identification information;
In the normal gaming state, when a predetermined result different from the specific result is derived from the variable display of the identification information, the game execution means enters a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state without executing the specific game. A gaming machine that
There are a plurality of categories related to the variation time required to display the variation of the identification information,
The game execution means is
Each time the variable display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, switching to a different classification from the current classification among the plurality of classifications;
The variable time is determined based on different conditions for each combination of the normal gaming state, the specific gaming state, and each of the plurality of categories.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view illustrating the standby state of the movable plate body, (B) is a front view illustrating the moving state of the movable plate body, and (C) is a front view illustrating the rotating state of the movable plate body. It is a front view of display devices. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. (A) is a table showing general map related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special pattern related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of a reach determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 1st look-ahead determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a background image for probability variation, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of a background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening performance, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round performance, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending performance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation effect with no reach. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure variation performance until reaching the reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach, and is a continuation of Drawing 23. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. 26 is a diagram showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 26. It is a figure showing an example of a movable object production. It is a figure showing an example of operation performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a hold effect. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of production control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46. FIG. (A) is a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is a configuration example of the common pattern fluctuation pattern determination table according to the first embodiment, and (C) is a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the first embodiment. This is an example of the configuration of such an auxiliary game control table. This is a configuration example of a losing symbol type determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table that is associated with a non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation P status "0". This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table that is associated with the first time saving state and the special figure 1 variation P status "0". It is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table that is associated with a non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation P status "1". This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table that is associated with the first time saving state and the special figure 1 variation P status "1". It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing according to the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a transition example 1 of the special figure 1 variant PTBL selection condition, and (B) is a diagram showing a transition example 2 of the special figure 1 variant PTBL selection condition. FIG. 3 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. (A) is a front view of the frame movable body in a standby state, (B) is a front view of the frame movable body with the first movable part raised to a predetermined operating position, and (C) is a front view of the frame movable body in a state where the first movable part is raised to a predetermined operating position. (D) is a front view of the frame movable body with the third movable part raised to a predetermined operating position, (E) is a front view of the frame movable body with the fourth movable part raised to a predetermined operating position. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration on the production control board side according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a specific look-ahead effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a specific look-ahead effect. (A) is a configuration example of a specific pre-read performance execution determination table, and (B) is a configuration example of a specific pre-read performance type determination table. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a specific preview performance. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a specific preview performance. It is a diagram showing a specific example of a specific preview performance. (A) is a configuration example of a specific preview performance execution determination table, and (B) is a configuration example of a specific preview performance type determination table. It is a figure showing the example of a change of specific notice performance. It is a figure showing the example of a change of specific notice performance. It is a figure showing the example of a change of specific notice performance. It is a front view of the game board concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the portion of the game board after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration on the game control board side according to the third embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot determination table according to the third embodiment, (B) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the third embodiment, and (C) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the third embodiment. This is a configuration example of a small winning symbol type determination table. It is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table according to a third embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of a normal small win game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a time saving small win game control table. (A) is a time chart showing the flow of the normal small winning game, and (B) is a time chart showing the flow of the time saving small winning game. (A) is the type of special symbol (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game in the case of a jackpot in the normal gaming state, and the gaming state to which the jackpot game transitions when the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type ends; This is an example of the configuration of a gaming state setting table showing the relationship between the game state and the ending conditions related to the gaming state, and (B) is the type of special symbol that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game when a jackpot is achieved in the time saving state (special symbol type). ), the gaming state to which the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type ends, and the ending condition related to the gaming state. It is a diagram showing a game flow that can be changed from reaching the ceiling. (A) is a configuration example of a standard time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, and (B) is a configuration example of a special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing according to a third embodiment. It is a figure which shows a part of flowchart of the sensor detection process based on 3rd Embodiment. 80 is a diagram showing a part of the flowchart of sensor detection processing according to the third embodiment, and is a continuation of FIG. 80. FIG. It is a flowchart of special operation processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart of special figure 2 judgment processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing according to a third embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing according to a third embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining a frame lamp concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a table showing the relationship between the types of special light emission performance modes and their specific performance contents.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characteristic parts of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In addition, in the following, in order to simplify the description, by writing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. for the symbol or code will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine Pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko game machine PY refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko game machine PY. Furthermore, "front" refers to the direction from the pachinko machine PY approaching the player facing the pachinko machine PY, and "backward" refers to the direction approaching the pachinko machine PY from the player facing the pachinko machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU inside. The gaming machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 that is fixed to the gaming parlor, an inner frame 22 that is attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. A door 23 is provided.

The outer circumferential shapes of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 when viewed from the front are approximately the same. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m having a large substantially vertically rectangular opening formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY cannot visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. Note that a transparent glass plate may be used as the transparent plate 23t instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed through the transparent plate 23t from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The handle 72k can be rotated clockwise, and the amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the amount of force applied to the game ball (shooting strength) to make the game ball launch. There is. Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operating portion of the first performance button 40k that visibly protrudes from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is shaped into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper tray 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A is formed for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. Further, on the upper surface of the lower tray 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A is provided for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Furthermore, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 that protrude forward are provided above, on the right side, and on the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, are arranged facing downward and arranged in the left and right direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. Further, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower part of the right side decorative body 32. The operation part of the second performance button 41k is shaped like a rod. Furthermore, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right side decorative body 32 to the right front portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left side decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. 1. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decoration body 61 is formed to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decoration body 61, there is an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and an outer rail 62 between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61.

On the front surface of the game board 1, an area surrounded by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, etc. forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a firing area 7 through which the fired game balls can pass to head toward the gaming area 6.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nails are used to properly control game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 into the general prize opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that leads to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration body 61 in the gaming area 6. The first starting winning device 11D has a first starting opening 11 formed into which a game ball can enter. The first starting winning device 11D has a non-operating structure. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Note that a warp portion 61w is formed from the left side to the lower end of the center decoration body 61 to allow the game ball to pass therethrough. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp section 61w passes through the inside of the warp section 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp section 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end of the center decorative body 61. A downward guide portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below this downward guide portion 61y.

Directly below the first starting port 11 in the gaming area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric tube opening/closing member 12k included in the electric tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the gaming area 6. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the second starting port 12 is opened to allow entry of a ball. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball, and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. Note that the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

On the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the gaming area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13, a big winning device 14D is provided. The grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a grand prize opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an AT opening/closing member 14k included in the big winning device 14D. That is, the big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big prize opening 14. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that its upper end is tilted forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k comes into a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the big prize opening 14 is opened to allow entry of a ball.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the grand prize opening 14, a predetermined number (nine in the basic embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the big prize opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the big winning device 14D in the gaming area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and a guiding path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the gaming area 6 (the front surface of the gaming board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the front. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the general winning port 10, and the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 13 are collectively described as the first starting port 11, They are collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as "left-handed hitting". On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as "right-handed hitting".

In the gaming area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with left-hand hitting is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with right-hand hitting. This flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the big prize opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the ball to the right.

In addition, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained. The board effect unit EU is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board presentation unit EU.

The image display device 50 is configured with a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section 50a capable of displaying 3D images. The image display device 50 is placed several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The platen movable body 55k includes a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is placed in the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downwardly moved from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that in the standby state, only a part of the lower end of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and the majority is invisible to the player (see FIG. 3(A)).

Then, the movable plate 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the platen movable body 55k is located approximately at the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and may be a position where the movable plate 55k is located above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). Note that the rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be performed when the movable platen body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, while being held at the operating position, and when moving from the operating position to the standby position.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a description will be given of the display devices 8 disposed to the right of approximately the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (the part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special pattern 1 display 81a that variably displays a first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 1"), a second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 2") ''), and a regular symbol display 82 that variably displays a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol"). In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 holding display 83a that displays the number of special drawings 1 held, which will be described later, and a special drawing 2 holding display 83b, which displays the number of special drawings 2 holding, which will be described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is carried out triggered by the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 12. The special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing will be described later. In addition, in the following explanation, special map 1 and special map 2 will be collectively referred to as "special map", and special map 1 lottery and special map 2 lottery will be collectively referred to as "special map lottery". In addition, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the "special figure display 81." Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the "special figure reservation display 83."

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a jackpot game with opening of the jackpot 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: off), 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the LED on the far right lights up as "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The manner in which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs blinking at once unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, this is the case when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during execution of variable display of special figures or during execution of a jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning prize. This reserved special drawing drawing and the variable display of the special drawing are called "special drawing reservation."

The special drawing reservation includes the special drawing 1 drawing that was held based on the prize won in the first starting opening 11, and "special drawing 1 pending" which represents the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning winning in the second starting opening 12. There is a special drawing 2 lottery held based on , and a "special drawing 2 pending" representing a variable display of special drawing 2. Then, the special figure 1 pending display 83a displays the number of special figure 1 pending, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 drawings and variable displays of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 pending display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 drawings and the number of variable displays of special figure 2.

It is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, or not to set them. In addition, when setting upper limits to the number of special symbols 1 and 2 reserved, the number of special symbols 1 and 2 can be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 and the number of special drawings 2 being held is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and the special figure is displayed by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold. Displays the number of Figure 1 reservations and Special Figure 2 reservations. In addition, in the following, the number of special drawings 1 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 1 reserved (U1)", and the number of special symbols 2 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2)". In addition, the "number of reserved special drawings 1" and "number of reserved special drawings 2" are collectively referred to as the "number of reserved special drawings." Furthermore, the "special figure 1 holding display 83a" and the "special drawing 2 holding display 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special drawing holding display 83."

Further, the variable display of the common symbol is executed when a common symbol lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball at the gate 13. The variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stationary displayed ordinary map (stopped ordinary map) is identification information representing the result of the ordinary map lottery drawn as a display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure, an auxiliary game accompanied by opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The general figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general map display device 82 represents the general map corresponding to the result of the general map lottery, that is, the result of the general map lottery. If the result of the general lottery is a win, both LEDs will eventually light up as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a win. Furthermore, if the result of the general drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED will finally light up, such as "■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. In the basic embodiment, the mode of fluctuating display of the common map is such that both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of the fluctuating display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs flashing at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained based on FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY, there is a game control board 100 that performs control (progress of the game) related to games that can obtain gaming profits, and a Power is supplied to the production control board 120 that controls the production, the image control board 140 that controls images, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, and each of the boards 100, 120, 140, and 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on/off.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 is mounted on the game control board 100, which controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. In addition, games in which gaming profits can be obtained that are controlled by the game control board 100 include special drawing lottery, variable display of special drawings, jackpot games, game state setting described later, general drawing lottery, and variable display of normal drawings. , auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary hit determination table, which will be described later. Game control tables, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage section 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage section 105 will be explained. As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, special drawings can be reserved, but if special drawings can be reserved, that is, if the number of special symbols reserved is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery etc. is obtained based on this winning prize. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the first starting port 11 is referred to as "special map 1 related judgment information", and the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12. The determination information that is determined is referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information." In addition, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information."

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Moreover, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

In addition, the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to display devices 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a firing device 72 is also connected thereto. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY and allows balls to be rented based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls that are paid out are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting them.

Further, the firing device 72 is a device that fires game balls. The handle 72k constitutes an operation section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball, and is included in the shooting device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect a contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the release control circuit 175.

Furthermore, a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing motor 72m so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained. In addition, within the rotatable range of the handle 72k,

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the performance control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the production control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the production control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The production control board 120 can be positioned as a production control unit that controls production, together with an image control board 140, an audio control circuit 161, and a sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the performance control section includes at least a performance control board 120, and performs game performance, customer waiting performance, and operation promotion using performance devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.). It is sufficient if it is possible to control the presentation.

The performances that are controlled by the performance control board 120 include game performances (special figure fluctuation performances, hold performances, jackpot game performances, etc.), customer waiting performances, and operations of the first performance button 40k and the second performance button 41k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operation during the valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123 that stores programs. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

The production ROM 123 stores programs for performing production control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The performance RAM 124 includes a starting winning command suspension storage section 125 that stores starting winning commands that will be described later, a symbol designation command storage section 126 that stores symbol designation commands that will be described later, and a special symbol that stores special symbol fluctuation start commands that will be described later. A fluctuation start command storage section 127 is provided.

Further, an image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Have them do it. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video Memory) that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145. Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or a portion of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, designs, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. (including designs) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured with a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the production control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a first performance button sensor 40a and a second performance button sensor 41a. The first performance button sensor 40a detects that the first performance button 40k is pressed. The second performance button sensor 41a detects that the second performance button 41k is pressed. When the first performance button sensor 40a and the second performance button sensor 41a detect that each has been operated, they output a signal to the performance control board 120 according to the detected content.

Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the production control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the production control board 120 include a motor 55m1 for rotating the board movable body, and a motor 55m2 for lifting and lowering the board movable body. The plate movable body rotation motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The board movable body lifting motor 55m2 can raise or lower the lifting member 55k2. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, below, the operation|movement of "the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively called "the operation|movement of the board movable body 55k." Furthermore, rotating the rotary member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the movable platen body 55k."

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that the sub-drive board 162 may be configured with a board and the CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and control the operation of the panel movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Main Games Played by the Gaming Machine Next, the main games played by the Pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a regular lottery when the fired game balls pass through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of general drawings and auxiliary games based on the general drawing start condition being satisfied, obtaining general drawing related determination information, and performing general drawing lottery. I can do it. The acquired ordinary symbol related determination information includes ordinary symbol random numbers, as shown in FIG. 8(A). The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time saving state (time saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number determination values) are appropriately distributed to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination/Ordinary Figure Variable Display Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Judgment is a determination for determining the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern by using the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination Table as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state), the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state. There is a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) that is used in the state.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, when a losing regular symbol (losing regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the regular symbol is determined to be a regular symbol fluctuation pattern in which the regular symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is displayed. Regarding the variable display of common figures in the case of stop display, a common figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern in which the common symbol fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display, a general pattern fluctuation pattern in which the general pattern fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined. It should be noted that these general figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is released.

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Pachinko game machine PY controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Note that the specific contents of each element, such as the number of openings and the opening time, can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time such as 0.2 seconds during which it is difficult for the electric chew 12D to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, if the game ball is opened twice for 2.5 seconds with a 1.0 second interval (closed) in between, the first opening time is longer than the first opening time, and the game ball enters the electric chew 12D. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time which is easy to open.

Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time for each auxiliary game is the total time for that auxiliary game, and for example, it may be opened multiple times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again after a closing interval. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting hole 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbols 1 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played, and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, in the following, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as a variable display of special symbols and a jackpot game based on the establishment of a starting condition, the acquisition of special symbol related determination information, and the performance of a special symbol lottery. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made regarding the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8(B), the acquired special symbol related determination information includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination made using the special figure related determination information will be explained.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment The jackpot judgment is to use a jackpot judgment table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with a gaming state to be described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") described later, and a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot determination table for normal probability") used in the high probability state described later. , "high probability jackpot determination table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number determination values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It should be noted that the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10(B), for example, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot (content advantageous to the player) consisting of gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table shows the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special symbol 1/special symbol 2), in other words, the winning pattern that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The types of the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 and the jackpot symbol of special symbol 2 can be set as appropriate, but for example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 As such, three types of jackpot symbols are provided: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, and three types of jackpot symbols are provided as the jackpot symbol of special pattern 2, jackpot symbol D, jackpot symbol E, and jackpot symbol F. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. Note that the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment For reach judgment, for example, when the result of jackpot judgment is a loss, use a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with a gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time saving state (time saving reach determination table). judgment table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into the reach determination results "with reach (reach occurs)" and "without reach (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY compares the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table and determines whether there is a reach or there is no reach (whether or not a reach occurs).

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, the result of reach determination, which is performed on the premise that the result of jackpot determination is "lose", is referred to as "reach with reach" (reach occurs), and "no reach" is referred to as "reach with reach (reach occurs)". This is sometimes referred to as ``no reach failure.'' Also, a "loss without reach" is sometimes referred to as a "do-no-lose", and a "lose with a reach" is sometimes referred to as a "lose-to-reach".

3-2-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination is performed using special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (special symbol fluctuation patterns) as shown in FIGS. The purpose is to determine a variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of variable display of special figures using a determination table (determination table).

The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time, the so-called "shaku", the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later, etc. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can also include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the performance flow (performance content) of the special symbol fluctuation performance. In addition, the type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is based on the type of special symbol (special pattern 1/special pattern 2) that performs variable display that is the target of determination, in other words, the starting opening where the prize was won due to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to relate to the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing this.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpots, one for lose with reach, and one for lose without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach and loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures 1. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach-less loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 pending number. Specifically, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses that is used for.

Then, the special figure display device 81 displays a variation of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, after the variable display of the special pattern, if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special pattern variable display (result of the special pattern lottery), the next variable display of the special pattern will not be performed immediately, and the variable display will continue. , a jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with the production flow of the special figure variation production as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, typical effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be explained.

The performances that make up the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle performance.

Normal fluctuation indicates that the performance symbols that had been stopped and displayed have started to fluctuate, and each of the performance symbols that make up each production symbol has been fluctuated and displayed at such high speed that it is difficult to recognize, suggesting that the variable display of the special symbol has started. It is a performance that In addition, the special symbol fluctuation performance (the part from the start of the variation of the production pattern to the stop of variation) related to the no-reach loss variation, and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special symbol variation production where the reach occurs, usually fluctuates. It may consist of

In N reach, immediately after a reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuations, for example, the production symbols that make up the reach are temporarily stopped at the same position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and the remaining one is This is a performance in which the performance symbols slow down and fluctuate at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol fluctuation performance ends at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol that fluctuates at that low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one performance pattern stops at a performance pattern different from the performance pattern that constitutes the reach. If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol changes again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while maintaining reach.

L reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, L reach is a performance that can be executed after N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than N reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than N reach. Even in L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is With the right effect pattern EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a (at the upper left of the display section 50a), the background image is switched to the L reach exclusive background image (the L reach exclusive video is played). Note that in L reach, 2DCG animation images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As for the content of L Reach, a video of a scene different from a match related to SP Reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character undergoing special training to learn a special move.

SP reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, SP reach is a performance that can be executed after, for example, N reach, and is performed for a longer time than L reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than L reach. Even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display section 50a, with the right effect symbol EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-specific background image (the SP reach-specific video is played). Note that in SP reach, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the content of SP Reach, a video of a match between a team to which the main character belongs and a team to which a rival of the main character belongs is displayed.

The battle performance is, for example, a performance that can be executed after reach in a time-saving state, and is a performance that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in battle production, the achieved reach is maintained, but the production symbols that make up the reach are reduced and moved to predetermined positions (for example, the left production symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right production symbol EZ3 is placed at the upper left of the display section 50a. (upper right corner), the background image will switch to the battle production-specific background image (the battle production-specific video will play). Furthermore, in the battle performance, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance, the performance symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance are displayed on the display section 50a. This includes not only a state where it is visible from the display section 50a, but also a state where the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or impossible to see from the display section 50a for a predetermined period of time in relation to a dedicated background image. Further, the contents of the normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the effects that make up the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. 11 and 12, it is possible to give a name to the special pattern variation pattern by associating it with the jackpot determination result and the content of the special pattern variation production. . The special pattern variation pattern related to a jackpot is sometimes collectively referred to as a "jackpot variation", and the special pattern variation pattern related to a loss is sometimes collectively referred to as a "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special pattern variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special pattern variation pattern in which N reach is performed is special pattern variation. The special pattern variation pattern where the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, loss fluctuations with reach are sometimes referred to as "loss fluctuations with reach", and loss fluctuations without reach are sometimes collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuations".

3-2-5. Pre-reading Judgment Before making a jackpot judgment, the pachinko gaming machine PY can make a pre-reading judgment based on the acquired special figure related judgment information using a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, for example. be. The look-ahead determination table is based on the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special figure that is variably displayed depending on the starting winning (special drawing 1/special drawing). 2). That is, the pre-reading determination table includes a first pre-reading determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where a prize is won in the first starting opening 11 and a variable display of special drawing 1 is performed, and a first reading determining table (FIG. 13) when a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 and a special drawing is displayed. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in which variable display of No. 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "first prefetch determination," and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "second prefetch determination."

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with gaming states (normal gaming state/high probability high base gaming state/low probability high base gaming state) which will be described later. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state (a lookahead decision table for normal gaming state), and a lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state). There is a look-ahead determination table for the state) and a look-ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state (a look ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state).

In other words, the lookahead determination table includes a first lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state, a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state. A first lookahead determination table used, a second lookahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a second lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a second lookahead determination table used in the low probability high base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used for.

In addition, by the pre-reading determination using the pre-reading determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol performed by winning the starting openings 11 and 12 is specified. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the pre-reading determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a pre-read determination result.

The pre-reading determination result including information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the production control board 120 as a pre-read determination result along with its generation. Note that the type of information to be specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate. For example, information regarding the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the pre-reading determination result.

As described above, a variable display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next special symbol is not variably displayed and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be explained.

3-3. Jackpot Game A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round game, and a final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

Note that it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Furthermore, hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is also referred to as "one round (1R)," and the tenth round game is also referred to as "10 rounds (10R)."

The pachinko game machine PY then controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate a jackpot game with a type of jackpot symbol. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the jackpot opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the jackpot opening for each opening, and the time to be closed until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

The pachinko game machine PY can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be explained.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 has elapsed, the big winning hole is activated. The winning hole 14 is closed and the round game ends. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game will be executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game may be executed by a method different from this. You may also do so. For example, if a device is provided in the gaming area 6 that can allocate the prizes to two winning holes, if a winning hole is won in one of the winning holes, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games will be executed, but if a prize is won in the other winning hole, a predetermined winning hole will be executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of a larger number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of a smaller number of round games than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot gaming states include a normal gaming state, which is a basic gaming state, and a specific gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

What is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Furthermore, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 that is advantageous to the player means that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. This means that it will take longer.

The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and a second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. Three types can be set: a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that instead of all of these three types of specific gaming states being installed in the pachinko gaming machine PY, some of the three types of specific gaming states can also be installed.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state and which is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a "normal probability state."

In addition, as a partial gaming state that focuses on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state is called a "time saving state". Toi. On the other hand, a gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state is referred to as a "non-time saving state". Here, the fact that the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time becomes longer means that it becomes easier to make the game ball enter the second starting port 12. Therefore, the time saving state can be positioned as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player because it is easier to win a prize to the second starting opening 12 (ease of winning a prize to the second starting opening 12) than the normal gaming state. .

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be explained in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier to win a prize in the second starting slot 12 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state will be described.

For example, by making the time saving state a state in which the normal pattern variation time is likely to be shorter than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as mentioned above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) is shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Let it be determined. As a result, in the time saving state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, then the number of regular lottery drawings per unit time is the same. As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In addition, by making the time saving state a state where the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 5.0 seconds in one auxiliary game. Make it open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal pattern fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time will be the same, so once The longer the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game, the longer the electric chew 12D is opened per unit time.

Furthermore, by making the time-saving state a state in which it is easier to determine a win in the winning determination compared to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 6600/65536, while in the time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 59936/65536. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal figure variation time in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability of a hit being determined is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In this way, in the time saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer. By satisfying the three conditions, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in the time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot win without greatly reducing the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal gaming state. In other words, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

Note that in the time saving state, all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may not all be met, but only some of the conditions may be met. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and winning into the second starting port 12 may be facilitated.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special pattern variable display per unit time is small, or special The average figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) in the starting opening are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In addition, in the following, the first specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability high base gaming state" and the second specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability low "Base gaming state" and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as "low probability high base gaming state." Furthermore, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state."

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base gaming state is controlled as a normal probability state and a time saving state, the high probability low base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a non time saving state, and the high probability high base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a time saving state. It can be said that it is a gaming state in which

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low probability low base gaming state, a low probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, a high probability high base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state can also be said to be a gaming state advantageous to the player because the jackpot opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be called "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, the high probability high base gaming state and the high probability low base gaming state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting slot 12 is higher than in the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability, low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the number of prize balls for one winning is greater than the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is first set. Further, the jackpot game state is set by the stop display of jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific gaming state is set by winning a jackpot and executing a jackpot game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be explained.

3-5. Setting a gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game Pachinko gaming machine PY can set a new gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game. That is, after a jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in a new game state. The duration of this gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, as a new gaming state, a specific gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, it is also possible to limit the period during which a specific gaming state can continue.

When limiting the duration of a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be ended when the termination condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high probability high base gaming state, when the termination condition is satisfied, a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability low base gaming state may be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may continue until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state, and when the end condition is met, the normal gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, the termination conditions for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the termination condition, for example, the number of execution times of special figure variable display can be set. In addition, it is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but also the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls fired after the jackpot game, the number of times the game ball passes through the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the termination condition to be the result of terminating the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Furthermore, these elements may be set as end conditions singly or in combination.

In addition, these ending conditions may be set the same for all specific gaming states that can be set after a jackpot game, or may be set for some specific gaming states among the specific gaming states that can be set. You may do so. Furthermore, the termination conditions may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the game state controlled after a jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled based on the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Furthermore, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E ends, the game may be controlled in a low probability high base gaming state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low probability high base game state, and the end condition can be set to 100 times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, the relationship between this jackpot type symbol, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, focusing on the gaming profit of a jackpot, a jackpot in which the game progresses with a high probability after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "high probability jackpot." Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and in a time saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot."

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 16 to 32.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, the special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, when the first performance button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a, and frequency settings for the effects to be performed. Note that setting items related to presentation can be set as appropriate. Further, the setting screen G101 can be made not to be displayed from the customer waiting demonstration video G100 by the player's operation.

The normal production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability low base gaming state" and indicates the normal gaming state. Further, a plurality of lower performance modes belonging to the normal performance mode can be provided. For example, a first normal presentation mode, a second normal presentation mode, a third normal presentation mode, etc. can be provided as presentation modes at a lower level belonging to the normal presentation mode.

In addition, below, the production mode of the lower hierarchy which belongs to production mode is also called "production stage." Accordingly, the first normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "first normal presentation stage," the second normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "second normal presentation stage," and the third normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "third normal presentation stage." say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically the production mode that is set when the special figure variation display starts for the first time after the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on is the first normal production stage ( (first normal performance mode). However, the type of production mode that is initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

In this way, when a plurality of performance stages belonging to the normal performance mode are provided, the performance stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set to a predetermined number of special symbol variable effects being performed without winning the jackpot. Further, as a switching condition, it can be set that a specific effect, such as a special symbol variation effect based on SP reach/loss variation, is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in special figure fluctuation effects, but the special figure variation effect is the entire section of the special figure variation effect when a reach does not occur, and a reach is established when a reach occurs. It can be divided into the first stage before the reach occurs, and the second stage after the reach is established in the case where a reach occurs. Note that the first part consists of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

In the first stage of the first normal presentation stage, a background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing a city view is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the second normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the field of a baseball field (FIG. 17(B): second normal background image G112) is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the third normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the inside of the restaurant (FIG. 17(C): third normal background image G113) is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first to third normal performance stages, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed. A special background image will be displayed depending on the type of reach.

Note that the dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a common background image in the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

Further, the normal performance mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal performance mode may be a performance mode indicating a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal performance mode may be provided. Further, a predetermined performance mode different from the normal performance mode may be set in a low probability low base game state and a high probability low base game state that occur under certain conditions.

The variable probability production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "high probability high base gaming state" and indicates the high probability high base gaming state. In the first stage of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the variable probability performance mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability performance mode is displayed.

The time-saving production mode can be set in the "low-probability, high-base gaming state" or "high-probability, high-base gaming state," and is either the low-probability, high-base gaming state or the high-probability, high-base gaming state; This is a production mode that indicates the state. In the first stage of the time-saving production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(E), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and time-saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the time-saving production mode, a dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach in the time-saving production mode.

In addition, the time-saving performance mode can be set only in the low probability high base gaming state, and can also be set as a performance mode indicating the low probability high base gaming state.

In addition, for either or both of the fixed variable production mode and the time-saving production mode, in the same way as the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is met, the production stage is switched. You can also do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(A), an opening image G1 that suggests the start of a jackpot game or a right-hand hit image G2 that encourages "right-hand hitting" is displayed on the display section 50a. A jackpot opening performance will be held where the will be displayed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

In addition, in the jackpot production mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(B), the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display section 50a, and the round image indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the display section 50a. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid out prize balls are displayed. In addition, during a round game, as a round effect, a background image (round background) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a as a background of the right-handed hit image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4. Image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display section 50a displays an ending image G5 that suggests the production mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that have been paid out. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball count image G6. be done.

In addition, hereinafter, the jackpot opening performance, the round performance, and the jackpot ending performance are collectively referred to as the "jackpot game performance" as the performance executed in the jackpot game. That is, a jackpot game performance is performed in the jackpot performance mode.

4-2. Special figure variation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result).

In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the fluctuating display of performance symbols, the performance symbols change and then stop. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the performance symbols.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation performance performed on the display section 50a, it is also possible to use images other than the variation display of production symbols. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display section 50a, a special feature using various presentation devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board moving device 55, a first presentation button device 40, and a second presentation button device 41 is used. It is possible to perform figure fluctuation effects.

Next, the effect patterns displayed on the display section 50a in the special figure variable effect executed in response to the special figure variable display will be explained. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and multiple types are provided. Specifically, one of the constituent elements of the effect pattern constitutes identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the effect patterns can be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect patterns can be provided. Then, a performance pattern including the number "1" is defined as a performance pattern G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For convenience, when the individual performance symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "performance symbol G10."

In addition, the numerical parts of the production patterns G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical parts of the production patterns G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the constituent elements of the effect pattern G10. Note that the configuration of the performance symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect pattern display area for displaying the effect pattern G10 will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the display section 50a is divided into three parts approximately equally in the horizontal direction, and the left, center, and right sides are divided into a left presentation pattern area 50b1, a middle presentation pattern area 50b2, and a right presentation pattern. This can be the area 50b3. The performance pattern G10 is displayed in any of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first part of the special symbol variation performance, the performance pattern G10 displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1", and the performance pattern G10 displayed in the middle performance pattern area 50b2 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1". They are collectively referred to as "middle performance symbols EZ2," and the performance symbols G10 displayed in the right performance symbol area 50b3 are collectively referred to as "right performance symbols EZ3." That is, in the left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, and right performance pattern area 50b3, the performance pattern G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the performance pattern G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is written as a left performance pattern EZ1, a middle performance pattern EZ2, and a right performance pattern EZ3.

In addition, as described later, in the special pattern variation performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, but ultimately the special symbol lottery results (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type, reach determination result) are shown. The stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in this manner. When announcing a jackpot as a result of the special drawing lottery, performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three performance symbols G10 of the same number are lined up side by side (so-called "Zero"). Therefore, hereinafter, the effect pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when notifying a jackpot will be referred to as a "jackpot effect pattern." For example, if the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed as "7, 7, 7," the jackpot design will be "performance symbol G10g," and if they are statically displayed as "9, 9, 9," the jackpot design will be " The production pattern is G10i. Furthermore, the jackpot effect symbols may be abbreviated by numbers included in the effect symbols. For example, if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10g", the jackpot effect pattern will be "7", and if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10i", the jackpot effect pattern will be "9". Furthermore, as will be described later, in the special symbol variation performance, the special symbol lottery result is completely displayed when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special symbol variation performance, before the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped and displayed may be changed. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), they are changed to a mode indicating another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). may be done. Therefore, when the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that first indicates a jackpot (before they are changed), the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers that constitute the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. It is also referred to as a ``jackpot effect pattern''.

In addition, in the special pattern variation production, the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are the production symbol G10 with the same number. Reach may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop display). As will be described later, reach is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state, and by reaching reach, the chance of winning a jackpot has increased. Therefore, the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 related to the reach is referred to as a "reach performance pattern". For example, when the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “1”, the reach production symbol becomes “production symbol G10a”, and when they temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “3” , the reach effect pattern becomes “effect pattern G10c”. Furthermore, the reach effect design may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect pattern. For example, if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c", the ready-to-reach performance symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in which small patterns are variably displayed in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display section 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, small symbols can be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. Although the design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, for example, the number part of the performance symbol G10 may be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed lines, but these are the left presentation pattern area 50b1, These are described to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, right effect symbol area 50b3, and small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, the performances that constitute the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance. Some of these will now be explained.

4-2-1. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of first performing normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal fluctuations will be specifically explained. As small symbols, a left small symbol KZ1, a medium small symbol KZ2, and a right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), on the display section 50a, the left effect pattern EZ1, the medium effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small pattern KZ1, the medium small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern When the variable display of the special pattern starts from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is started, the variable display of the special pattern starts as shown in FIG. 20(B) As shown in the figure, the special figure variation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 can be made different. For example, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling each production symbol EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling each of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a. It is also possible to change the positions one after another at a fixed position. Note that the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be the same.

In addition, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side thereof, such as background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of this special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with no reach and no loss (for example, normal loss variation), the variable display of the special pattern ends (special pattern (stop display), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss eyes (so-called "rose eyes") that are unique to no-reach losses.

Towards the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 20(D), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stops (temporary stop) at the center position.

Finally, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in a horizontally lined state at approximately the vertical center position, are completely stopped all at once as shown in FIG. 20(F). , and the stop is confirmed (the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), come to a complete stop, that is, when the final stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to EZ3 KZ3 stops all at once at the same random number as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, when we say that the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stop, we mean that the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move greatly as in a scroll display, but rather shake slightly or make small reciprocating motions on the spot. say. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, but this provisional stop display and A definitive stop display is sometimes referred to as a "stop display" in a broad sense. In addition, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the performance symbols are stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3 → middle performance symbol EZ2, but the order of stopping ( The method) is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, we will explain how reach is established. Even if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), basically the same as the case without reach described above, on the display section 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the variable display of the special symbols starts from a state where the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, As shown in FIG. 21(B), the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and at the same time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. As shown in 21(D), the right effect symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and a reach is established. When a reach is achieved, an image G11 indicating that a reach is achieved (a reach suggesting image) is displayed. Incidentally, even if the reach is achieved with the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 continues to be performed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in the order of left production symbol EZ1 → right production symbol EZ3, but the order (method) of temporary stopping is as follows. It is not limited to , and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the numbers of the production symbols that constitute the reach are not limited to "5" either. Further, the position where the vehicle is temporarily stopped (temporary stop) is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols forming the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be in other directions such as a diagonal direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special symbol variation performance when there is no reach and a loss, and the section from the start of the special symbol variation performance when the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be made into normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform various preview performances such as a so-called "pseudo series", a cut-in preview, and a dialogue preview until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is also possible to enter the so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established after a normal fluctuation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win. Next, N reach will be specifically explained.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point on. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22(A), the state when reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the medium effect pattern EZ2, which is fluctuatingly displayed (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually slows down.

If the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), from the state where reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 will temporarily be at approximately the center position in the vertical direction. The game stops (temporarily stops), and a stop display of the production pattern indicating a loss is performed. At this time, reach has been established, so as shown in Figure 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol consisting of a number ("4" in Figure 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers that constitute the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, as shown in FIG. The left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporary stop) completely stop at a loss that is unique to a loss with a reach, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, 3 The three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 stop all at once at the same loss points as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are unique to a reach loss, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special symbol variation performance does not end at N reach, as shown in Figure 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium performance symbol EZ2 that has not stopped will fluctuate at high speed again, and N while the reach is maintained. It may develop (switch) from reach to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY can perform L Reach after N Reach. The L reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in the case of L reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Moreover, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), a background image exclusively for L reach (background image for L reach G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the L reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the content is such that the main character confesses his feelings to a girl.

When the L reach background image G114 is displayed, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a meeting place, as shown in FIG. 23(A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23(B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, a production symbol with the number "5" that constitutes the reach and a production symbol with the number "4" that does not constitute the reach appear as the medium production symbol EZ2. It rotates slowly, coming out from the back side to the front side, and then returning to the back side.

While the rotation of the number "4" production symbol and the number "5" production symbol continues, Thule related to the L reach background image G114 progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), a scene appears in which the main character confesses his feelings to the girl. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, the effect pattern with the number "5" that makes up the reach and the effect pattern with the number "4" that does not make up the reach seem to mutually repel the opponent. collide with each other. The number "5" production symbol constitutes a reach, and the number "4" production symbol does not constitute a reach, so the number "4" production symbol is blown away and the number "5" production symbol is If it remains, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established in a manner that indicates a jackpot, while if the production symbol with the number "5" is blown away and the production symbol with the number "4" remains, the production is in a manner that indicates a loss in reach. The stop display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene in FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L reach, and a performance suggesting a jackpot (jackpot suggestion performance) is executed or a performance suggesting a loss (loss suggestion performance) is executed. This constitutes a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point").

At the winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), a smiling girl will appear close-up on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1). After this is displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), the main character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. displayed in the following manner. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character happy after successfully confessing and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion production. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the figure is displayed in the L reach background image G114. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), a close-up of a girl with a sad expression is displayed on the display section 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she is disappointed because she failed to confess. The main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. is displayed. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the reach is out of reach.

The display of the main character being disappointed after failing to confess constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing position for reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach Also, the pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the L reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Furthermore, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a background image exclusively for SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the SP reach background image G115 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the story consists of a confrontation between the main character and an enemy character who is a rival of the main character. ing. Note that the main character is a baseball pitcher, the enemy character is a baseball batter, and the two face off in the positions of a pitcher and a batter in a baseball game.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25(A), and then an enemy character appears in the center of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 25(B). An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws a ball, and as shown in FIG. 26(B), the ball advances toward the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and a scene is reached in which the confrontation between the protagonist character and the enemy character is about to come to an end. This scene constitutes a turning point (win-lose turning point) in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, where the main character wins, suggesting a jackpot, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the battle, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character shouting after winning the battle and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion performance. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the match, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss.

The display of the main character being disappointed after losing the battle constitutes a presentation suggesting a loss. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing eye for reach.

Next, the movable object performance and operation performance performed in the special figure variation performance will be explained. The movable body performance and operation performance may be performed as part of the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, or jackpot game performance, etc., or may be performed independently of these performances. Sometimes it is done. First, I will explain the moving object performance.

4-3. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body performance that involves the movement of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure variation performance or a jackpot game performance. The movable object performance is a performance using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable object effect functions as an effect that suggests the development to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first As shown in (B), the plate movable device 55 is activated, and the plate movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position when viewed from the front, and is held at that position for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board moving device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. Note that the operation details of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Performance Next, the operation performance will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY performs an operation promotion performance at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure fluctuation performance or a jackpot game performance, and an operation result performance according to the operation of the first performance button 40k, the second performance button 41k, etc. It is possible to perform operations including. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance, and each is a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance.

For example, as mentioned above, when a winning or losing point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period (operation valid period) occurs during which the pressing operation of the first production button 40k is valid, and along with the occurrence of this operation valid period, , as shown in FIG. 29(A), a performance (operation promotion performance) that prompts the user to operate the first performance button 40k is performed.

In the operation promotion performance, a first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first performance button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing An image (operation image) G12b representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c.

Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that FIG. 29(B) shows a state in which the operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the operation valid time has elapsed.

Then, when the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or after the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, After the remaining time of the valid operation period runs out without 40k being operated, the operation result presentation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 29(C), for example, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the operation result is that the panel movable device 55 is operated, the panel movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is lowered. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable object presentation. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 accompanying the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the movable board 55k is raised, thereby ending the operation result production. When the operation result presentation is completed, a jackpot suggestion presentation is performed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed during the operation validity period, or the first production button 40k is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the performance button operation validity period runs out without being executed, the operation result performance is not performed and the loss suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board moving device 55 or the display of the effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special symbol variation performance, but can also be executed in the jackpot performance.

4-5. Pre-reading effect Next, a pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display subject to special figure reservation is executed will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold for which no jackpot judgment has been made, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, at any timing of the special figure fluctuation effect. . The pre-read performance is a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation, and functions as a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reservation. As an example of a look-ahead performance, there is a reservation change notice using a reservation performance that represents special map reservation. Here, the pending performance and pending change notice performed in the normal performance mode will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 30(A), the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a section in the substantially center of the lower end of the display section 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially equally in the left and right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the first variable display of special figure 1 is displayed based on the special figure 1 related random number that occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 reserves and corresponds to the special figure 1 reserve. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth reserved special figure 1 reservations are generated based on the special figure 1 related random numbers corresponding to the special figure 1 reservations. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold, in which special figure 1 variable display is performed, is displayed second to fourth.

In addition, below, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in 1st area|region 50d1 is called "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icons displayed in the second area 50d2, third area 50d3, and fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2" and "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 3." "Special figure 1 reservation" and "Special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, the existing special drawing 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order in which they occur.

Moreover, the display area 50e is formed to the left of the hold display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the "hold effect" corresponding to special drawing 1 hold is Although not included, since the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related, hereinafter, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon will be collectively referred to as "hold effect". Further, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon." Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation display being executed that the icon indicates is also referred to as "the variation".

In addition, in FIG. 30(A), the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e are clearly indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly shown by broken lines; This is written to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be explained. In the following explanation, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (the special figure variable effect is in progress) and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the aforementioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold (order of hold) A reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2) is displayed, and in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown), a reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2 A hold icon HA3 representing special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the aforementioned display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30(B) is the normal mode.

In this manner, in the hold performance, special drawings 1 are displayed in order of occurrence from the left end to the right of the hold display area 50d. That is, the variable display of reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed with a reservation icon. Ru.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Continuously, when variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown). to the first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are each shifted one by one to the left. This means that the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold that the hold icon HA3 represents is the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation in response to the special figure variable display being started next.

Further, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, so it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. That is, the word "icon" is prefixed to "pending" for the icon displayed in the pending display area 50d, and "relevant" for the icon displayed in the display area 50e. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition for the special symbol fluctuation display is satisfied for the special symbol reservation indicated by the hold icon, the special symbol fluctuation display related to the establishment of the start condition is A corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when changing from a hold icon to the relevant icon, in other words, when moving the icon from the hold display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the reserved display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special drawing 1 reservation occurs, a new reservation is made according to the occurrence of the special symbol 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 30(E). Icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting slot 11 and a special drawing 1 related random number is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon will disappear when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, it will remain in the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (on hold and in progress). Depending on the icon, the icon exists under different names (pending icon and the icon).

By the way, as mentioned above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko game machine PY can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on this validity information and special symbol variation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called a "hold notice."

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when a pending notice is given, the player can expect that he may win a jackpot with the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of the suspension notice will be explained. As a specific example of the suspension notice, assume that the display mode of the suspension icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) becomes a special mode.

One type of reservation notice is a reservation notice that enters a special mode immediately after the reservation icon is displayed, in other words, a reservation notice is given when special drawing 1 reservation occurs (at the time of winning at the first starting gate 11). There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). In addition, in the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, even if you try to make it completely stationary, the display position does not move, but the It may also be configured so that it sways slightly in the field.

Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (the hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment after being displayed, but it may be displayed in a special mode and the period during which it is displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of reservation notice, there is a reservation notice type in which the reservation icon takes a special mode when it moves, in other words, a reservation icon change notice is given when the special figure 1 reservation is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) moves to the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation effect) is started based on the special symbol 1 reservation represented by the reservation icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 that was displayed moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 that was displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, its display mode changes from a normal mode to a special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (a notice of hold is given) .

Furthermore, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the reservation notice, so that the degree of jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. The jackpot expectation level indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white < green < red < gold.

In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the pre-read effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, but includes images other than the hold icon HA on the display section 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission from the frame lamp 53, and board movement. It is possible to perform the operation using a presentation device other than the image display device 50, such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as a production mode of the look-ahead production, in addition to a production mode that continues without interruption from the execution until the special symbol change display starts, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, there is also a stoppage of the production pattern. It is also possible to use a performance mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time a display is performed or a variable display of performance symbols is started.

5. Game control by game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 33 to 42. Note that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

Further, counters, timers, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko game machine PY is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) is performed.

In the power-on process, the gaming control microcomputer 101 first sets permission for access to the gaming RAM 104. This makes it possible to write and read information to and from the gaming RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a RAM clear switch (not shown) mounted on the game control board 100 has been operated (ON or not). The RAM clear switch is basically an operation means that can be operated by a clerk at a game parlor, and when the RAM clear switch is operated, the gaming RAM 104 is cleared.

If the RAM clear switch (not shown) is not operated, the game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether the power-off flag is ON. The power outage flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of a power outage, and is a flag that is turned on in a power outage monitoring process that will be described later.

If the power-off flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates a checksum and compares it with the checksum calculated at the time of the power-off. The checksum is calculated by considering the gaming information stored in the gaming RAM 104 as numerical values.

If the checksum values match, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the storage contents of the gaming RAM 104 are normal, and manages the setting of the working area of the gaming RAM 104 when the power is restored. In this setting process, the power restoration information is read from the gaming ROM 103, and this power restoration information is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power-off flag and performs a power-on command setting process.

In the power-on command setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a setting process for outputting a power-on command to the production control board 120 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, a predetermined time until the power-on command is output is set in a timer, and subtraction of the time set in the timer is started. Then, when the value of the subtracted timer becomes "0", it means that a predetermined time has elapsed, so a power-on command is set in a predetermined output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Thereby, the set power-on command is outputted to the production control board 120 in an output process (S101) described later.

In addition, if the power-off flag is not ON, the power may not have been properly shut off, or if the RAM clear switch (not shown) has been operated, the game control microcomputer 101 Clear all game information stored in RAM 104. Thereafter, the gaming control microcomputer 101 initializes the work area of the gaming RAM 104. In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the gaming ROM 103 is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command to the production control board 120 to notify that the RAM has been cleared, and performs a power-on command setting process.

After the power-on process, the game control microcomputer 101 disables interrupts (S002) and executes the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the regular symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are updated by adding one. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) ends and until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) The process of updating counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. In addition, if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while interrupts are disabled, the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after interrupts are enabled (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the production control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and inputs the detection signal from the lower tray full switch to the game as the lower tray full data. The data is stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005)). After the end of S005), this is performed both during the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started.

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes (S107) and ends the game control side timer interrupt process (S005). Other processing (S107) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control process is performed to pay out prize balls to the player. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 are set to " A check is made to see if it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the gaming control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later) ), the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output processing (S101) of the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the data that was set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Outputs commands etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be explained using FIGS. 35 and 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the general winning hole 10, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO in S201), the process advances to step S203, and if a game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered into the game ball. General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("3" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the general winning hole 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process advances to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether the normal operation status (described later) is 1 or not, in other words, whether the normal figure variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process advances to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) is The normal symbol random number indicated by is acquired as the common symbol related determination information (S205), the acquired common symbol related determination information is stored in the common symbol retention storage section 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process advances to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. Second starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls (“2” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the second starting hole 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12.

Next, if the number of special drawings 2 pending (specifically the value of the counter (special drawing 2 holding number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special drawings 2 holding) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more, It is determined whether there is one (S209). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process advances to step S214, but if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "4" or more (less than "4"), ( NO in S209), the special figure 2 reservation number addition process is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, the special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start winning command is specified by comparing the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second starting winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 11, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. First starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S215). In the first starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("4" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the first starting hole 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 reservations (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not greater than (less than) "4" (NO in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. ), the special figure 1 reservation number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first lookahead determination process, the first start winning command is identified by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first lookahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserves in the special figure 1 reserve storage section 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. If a game ball has not entered the grand prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if a gaming ball has entered the grand prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the memory is stored in the gaming RAM 104. It is determined whether the counter value of the provided big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (S222). The big winning hole prize counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the big winning hole 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the basic embodiment, the prescribed number of prizes to win is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is ended, and the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not more than "11", that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning hole prize counter is incremented by 1 (S223), and the big winning hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player (S224). ), the sensor detection process ends. In addition, in the grand winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("9" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the grand winning hole 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the grand winning hole 14.

Note that sensors other than sensors 10a to 14a are provided as sensors capable of detecting game balls, and processes other than those shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed based on the sensor detecting a game ball. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, normal operation processing regarding control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing regarding the general figure display 82 and electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", a normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", a normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", a normal symbol confirmation process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. Note that the "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 86. Furthermore, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82 for the normal pattern fluctuation time according to the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern. , and change the normal operation status to "2". In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command in accordance with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the common symbol variation time has elapsed since the fluctuating display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether or not to end the fluctuating display of the common symbol), and If it is determined that the figure variation time has elapsed, the normal figure is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process (S1104) is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), it is determined whether a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether to end the stop display of the common symbol). If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped and displayed regular symbol is a losing symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the time of starting the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current gaming state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big prize winning device 14D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing regarding the special figure display 81, special figure reservation display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", gaming state setting processing (S1506) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process that is performed during standby when variable display of special symbols and jackpot games are not being performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation process will be detailed later.

The special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be detailed later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. When the jackpot game ends, the special operation status is changed to "5". Note that when each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and the state where the jackpot game is controlled is the "jackpot game state", and the setting of the special operation status "4" is called "jackpot". It is called "gaming state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high probability state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the termination condition for the high probability state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number of times counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when controlling in a time saving state after a jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the remaining time saving number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming status command indicating the gaming status after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the gaming status setting process.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 pending number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no memory of the special figure 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 12, It is determined whether the number of 1 reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no memory of the special drawing 1 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol waiting process.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "0" but the number of special drawings 1 holding is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special drawing 2 related determination information, but the first start If there is one or more stored pieces of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning in the mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special symbol 1 determination process (S1609), the first stored special symbol random number among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special symbol 1 pending storage unit 105a is read out, and the special symbol random number is read out based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state. Then, a judgment is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss (jackpot judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (jackpot symbol type determination). Then, jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in a special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and a symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "loss", loss symbol data representing a loss is set in the special pattern buffer, and a symbol designation command representing a loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (S1652) and proceed to step S1654; if it is not in a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), the time-saving After selecting the state special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1653), the process advances to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process advances to step S1655, and if it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), a jackpot symbol is selected from the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process advances to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, a reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is compared with a reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is a reach or no reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 next determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process advances to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special symbols 1 is checked, and the result is selected in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss according to the number of reserved special figures 1 (S1657), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special pattern variation pattern random number, and compares the special pattern variation pattern random number with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. Determine the special figure 1 variation pattern The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and starts the special figure 1 variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Note that the special operation timer is updated by 4ms in other processing in the game control side timer interrupt processing. In addition, the set special figure 1 variation start command includes information regarding the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and information about the special figure variation pattern judgment performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). Contains information about the results (information on special pattern fluctuation patterns, including information on whether there is a reach or not and special symbol fluctuation time).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special pattern 1 display 81a to start displaying the special pattern 1 in a variable manner based on the special pattern variation time corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a Special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the first reservation (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1612). In this way, the special drawing 1 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reservation number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns the customer waiting flag OFF (S1617), and performs special symbol waiting processing. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process ends without executing step S1617.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more pieces of special drawings 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12 are stored. If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 judgment process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process (S1603) are basically the same processing contents as the special figure 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). .

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the explanation will be omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1603), except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Since this process is similar to S1610), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b to Special figure 2 pending storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the fourth pending item (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1605). In this way, the special drawing 2 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special map 2 reservation number counter (S1606), and changes the special map 2 reservation number indicated by the special map 2 reservation display 83b by decreasing it by "1" (S1607). ), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process advances to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation is performed only when the special symbol 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation. In the basic embodiment, it is easier for the player to win a jackpot symbol with a large profit in the lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation than in the lottery based on the special symbol 1 reservation. In addition, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 hold and the extinguishment of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs, regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be explained using FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1701). If you do not want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (NO in S1701), you can end the special symbol fluctuating process, and if you want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (YES in S1701), you can display the fluctuating special symbols on the special symbol display 81. At the same time, special symbols are stopped and displayed according to the symbol data (jackpot symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 (S1702).

Next, a preset special symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special symbol variation stop command indicating the end of the variation display of the special symbol is output to the buffer. (S1704), changes the special operation status to "3" (S1705), and ends the special symbol variation process.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be explained using FIG. 42. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1751). If you do not want to end the special symbol stop display (NO in S1751), if you end the special symbol confirmation process and end the special symbol stop display (YES in S1751), you are currently in a normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752). In this way, strictly speaking, after the stop display of the special symbol starts, in other words, after the special symbol finalization time has elapsed after the fluctuating display of the special symbol ends, the stop display of the special symbol, in other words, the jackpot determination. The special figure variable display based on is completed. Hereinafter, the elapse of the special symbol confirmation time after the start of the stop display of the special symbol may be referred to as "determined display of the special symbol/determined display of the special symbol". Further, the final display of the special symbol is the final stage of the stop display of the special symbol, and is included in the stop display of the special symbol.

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1753), the process advances to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time-saving state (YES in S1753), it displays the remaining variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving state. The value of the remaining time saving number counter that measures the number of times (remaining number of time saving) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining time saving number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process advances to step S1757, and if the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0" (in S1755) YES), the time-saving state is shifted to a non-time-saving state (the time-saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), change the special operation status to "1" (S1762), finish the special symbol confirmation process, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), reset the gaming state ( A normal gaming state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number of times counter and time saving remaining number of times counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command (jackpot opening command) indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot opening command) indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of effects by the effect control board 120 will be explained using the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 43 to 47. Note that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the control of effects by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the production control main process, first, a power-on process corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. Note that the random numbers for performance determination include various random numbers for determining performance content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special symbol variation performance pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for judgment regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation performance start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a (performs various effects using the image) according to the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various performances using audio), and controls the sub-drive board. 162 to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light (to perform various effects by emitting light), and to operate the board movable body 55k (to perform various effects by movement). The various performances include a special figure variation performance, a jackpot game performance (jackpot opening performance, round performance, jackpot ending performance), customer waiting performance, operation performance, and pre-reading performance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100, is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 44. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1ms period is input to the production control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the production control microcomputer 121 creates first production button switch data based on the detection signal from the first production button sensor 40a. The performance control microcomputer 121 creates second performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the second performance button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the production control microcomputer 121 uses the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the image production, etc. is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control time related to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the production control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 10ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 45. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process, the production control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process to analyze the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be explained in detail in the basic embodiment described below.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs audio control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161 based on the performance content indicated by the special figure variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124. is output.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the performance contents indicated by the special symbol variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124, and the like.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be explained using FIGS. 46 and 47. In the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the gaming control board 100, in other words, it has received a start winning command. It is determined whether the data has been stored in the buffer (S4301). If the performance control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a starting winning process in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. In the starting winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command pending storage section 125 in the performance RAM 124. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored starting winning command and determines whether or not to execute a pre-read performance that indicates the expected level of jackpot. In addition to a pending notice in which a pending icon is displayed in a special manner, the pre-reading effect includes a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these pre-read effects, a pre-read effect start command for executing the decided effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing a prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. Sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading effect using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (performing a pre-reading effect using light emission). It is possible to operate 55k (execute a pre-read effect by operation).

In step S4303, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if it has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the production control microcomputer 121 transfers the symbol designation command to the production RAM 124. The symbol designation command is stored in the symbol designation command storage section 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure variation start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process advances to step S4307, while if the special figure variation start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure variation production are determined. , performs a special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect.

In the special figure variation production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage section 127 in the production RAM 124. Next, based on the contents of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, losing special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, the production symbol EZ1 is stopped and displayed. -EZ3, and a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination for determining small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special symbols and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, the values of random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for stop symbol pattern determination with the selected stop symbol pattern table and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a no-reach variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to result in a so-called "missing pattern". In addition, if the special symbol variation pattern is a reach/loss variation, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to The KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected to form a so-called "Zero" according to the production mode and the type of jackpot symbol. .

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 generates a special figure fluctuation performance pattern in which the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance are associated, based on the performance mode in which it is staying and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. Select a special figure variation performance pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation performance pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation performance pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special symbol variation production pattern determination table that is associated with the special symbol variation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment table, the value of the random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation performance pattern Judgment values) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination as a random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination, and selects a special figure based on the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination. Performs fluctuation performance pattern judgment.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for determining the special pattern variation performance pattern with the selected special pattern variation performance pattern table in the special pattern variation performance pattern determination, determines the special pattern variation performance pattern, and determines the special pattern variation performance pattern. At the same time, the data representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern (special figure fluctuation performance pattern data) representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation performance start command indicating the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes a predetermined command from the image ROM 142. The special figure variation effect is performed using the image on the display section 50a of the image display device 50.

Further, the special figure variation performance start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using the images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using the sound output from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using the light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance content of the figure fluctuation performance and the performance content of the special figure fluctuation performance based on the operation performed by the board movable body 55k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs audio via the audio control circuit 161 (executes the special figure variation effect using audio), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executes the special figure variation effect by emitting light). (performs a variable effect), and operates the board movable body 55k (executes a special figure variable effect by operation).

In step S4307, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special symbol fluctuation stops. A special symbol variation performance end process (S4308) is performed to end the performance (stop the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform a stop display).

In the special pattern fluctuation performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special pattern fluctuation stop command, and ends the special pattern fluctuation performance appropriately based on the analysis result (performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and small pattern KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variable display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the gaming state command (NO in S4309), it proceeds to step S4311, whereas if it has received the gaming state command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the gaming state command. , identifies the gaming state represented by the gaming state command, and performs a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state (S4310).

The production control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 in the gaming state setting process. For example, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "00H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state. Further, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "01H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a high probability high base gaming state. Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag "02H" in the gaming state flag area of the performance RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a low probability high base gaming state.

In step S4311, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if it has received the customer waiting command (YES in S4311), it performs customer waiting performance standby processing. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting performance standby process, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the waiting time (customer waiting performance waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the performance pattern to the start of the customer waiting performance. Set it on the timer. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has elapsed, and if it determines that the waiting time has elapsed, it sends a customer waiting performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the customer waiting performance. set in the output buffer of

In step S4313, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the jackpot opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the jackpot opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the jackpot opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, while if it has received the jackpot opening command (YES in S4313), it starts the opening of the jackpot game. An accompanying jackpot opening performance start process is performed (S4314).

In the jackpot opening production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the jackpot opening command and, based on the analysis result, determines whether to execute the jackpot opening production according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on. If it is determined and executed, select the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern), and write a jackpot opening performance start command in the performance RAM 124 to start the jackpot opening performance with the selected jackpot opening performance pattern. Set to output buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether the number of rounds designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the number of rounds designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the number of rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), round production start processing is performed in conjunction with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round performance start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the number of rounds designation command, determines whether or not to execute a round production according to the round game to be started from now on, and if it is to be executed, executes the round production. The performance content (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4317, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is finished, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending performance start process ( After performing S4318) and production mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

In the jackpot ending production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending production according to the ending of the jackpot game that will be executed from now on. The performance content (jackpot ending performance pattern) of the jackpot ending performance is selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a process of setting the performance mode after the jackpot game (setting the performance mode) based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command, in the performance mode setting process. control processing).

For example, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the production control microcomputer 121 sets it to a probability variable production mode that suggests a high probability high base gaming state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the variable performance mode start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , displays the background image G120 for probability variation as a background image, and outputs the BGM for probability variation as BGM.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, or jackpot symbol E, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects either a high probability high base gaming state or a low probability high base gaming state. Set a time-saving production mode in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the performance mode flag indicating the time-saving performance mode in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and sends a time-saving performance mode start command indicating that the time-saving performance mode is set to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Set to . When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described as the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the gaming states related to the ease of winning into the second starting port 12 include a non-time-saving state that constitutes a normal gaming state, and a non-time-saving state that is more likely to be entered into the second starting port 12 than the non-time-saving state. There is a time-saving state in which the ease of winning is high, and the time-saving state further includes a first time-saving state and a second time-saving state in which the ease of winning at the second starting port 12 is higher than the first time-saving state. The second time saving state is the same as the time saving state according to the basic embodiment. In other words, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the hit determination related to the second time saving state is 59937/65536, the normal figure fluctuation time related to the second time saving state is 5 seconds, and the auxiliary game related to the second time saving state The opening pattern of the second starting port 12 is two openings for 2.5 seconds with an interval of 1.0 seconds in between.

In the first time-saving state, the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 12 is higher than in the non-time-saving state, but the ease of winning in the second starting port 12 is higher in the non-time-saving state than in the second time-saving state. close. In detail, the first time-saving state is infinitely closer to the non-time-saving state in terms of the ease of winning the second start opening 12 than the non-time-saving state. Here, a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 48(A), a configuration example of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. A configuration example of the auxiliary game control table according to the embodiment is shown in FIG. 48(C).

As shown in FIG. 48(A), FIG. 48(B), and FIG. 48(C), the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time saving state is 6601/65536, and The normal figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the opening pattern of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game related to the non-time saving state is one opening for 0.2 seconds, whereas in the first time saving state The probability of being determined to be a hit in the hit determination is 6701/65536, the normal figure fluctuation time related to the first time saving state is 25 seconds, and the opening of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game related to the first time saving state. The pattern is one 0.5 second opening. In this way, the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 12, in other words, the factors that make up the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, specifically, the probability of winning in the winning judgment, the Regarding both the figure fluctuation time and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game, the first time saving state is much closer to the non-time saving state than the second time saving state. Therefore, in the first time saving state, the pachinko game machine PY1 fires the game ball by hitting the right hand aiming at the second starting port 12, as in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state). Rather than winning a prize, it is easier to aim at the first starting hole 11 and shoot a game ball with a left-handed hit to make the first starting hole 11 win a prize.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, there are two types of losing symbols, losing symbols A and losing symbols B, as losing symbols related to the special drawing 1. The losing pattern A is in the same position as the losing pattern related to the special drawing 1 according to the first embodiment, and has the same function in terms of specifications. On the other hand, the losing symbol B is a losing symbol that shifts the gaming state related to the ease of winning into the second start opening 12 to the first time saving state. That is, when the stop display of the losing symbol B is performed in the special figure 1 variable display, the first time saving state is directly entered without the jackpot game being executed.

In addition, in the first time saving state, if the special pattern variable display of loss variation is executed 100 times without a jackpot game being executed in the first time saving state, the loss pattern will stop at the 100th special pattern variable display. The display ends when a fixed time has elapsed after being displayed, and the display remains in a non-time saving state. In other words, the end condition for the first time-saving state is that the special figure variable display of loss variation is executed 10 times without a jackpot game being executed, and the specified number of special figure variable displays related to the first time-saving state is (Specified number of times to save time) is 100 times.

When the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 determines that the game is a loss in the jackpot determination regarding the special figure 1, it determines the type of the losing symbol regarding the special symbol 1 by determining the type of losing symbol. Loss symbol type determination is performed using a loss symbol type determination table. FIG. 49 shows a configuration example of a losing symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 49, two types of losing symbols, a losing symbol A and a losing symbol B, are provided as losing symbols in the special drawing 1. According to the losing symbol type determination table related to special drawing 1, losing symbol A is determined with a probability of 90%, and losing symbol B is determined with a probability of 10%.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 related determination information includes, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol random number, jackpot symbol type random number, reach random number, and special symbol variation pattern random number, a losing symbol for performing losing symbol type determination. A type random number is also included. Therefore, a losing symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-HS) related to the losing symbol type random number is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and the losing symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-HS) is specially Like the symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T) and the jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), it is updated in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). Then, in step S218, the game control microcomputer 101 also acquires a losing symbol type random number as the special figure 1 related determination information, and stores it in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104. Note that the range of the losing symbol type random number can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, it is set to "0 to 99".

In the loss symbol type determination table, the determination value of the loss symbol type random number (the loss symbol type random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to the loss symbol type that is the result of the loss symbol type determination so that the selection rate shown in FIG. 49 is achieved. It is being Therefore, as will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the acquired losing symbol type random number with the losing symbol type determination table to determine the type of losing symbol. Note that the number of losing symbol types and the selection rate of each losing symbol type are not limited to the first embodiment, and may be set as appropriate.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table is associated with the special figure odd P status in addition to the gaming state, jackpot determination result, reach determination result, and number of reserved special figures 1. There is. That is, the game control microcomputer 101 uses the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in addition to the game state, jackpot determination result, reach determination result, and number of special figure 1 reservations. Sometimes selections (decisions) are made based on status as well. In other words, the conditions for determining the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern include the special figure odd P status in addition to the gaming state, jackpot determination result, reach determination result, and number of special figure 1 reservations.

The special figure strange P status is identification information representing the situation related to the game in the normal game state and the first time saving state, and is switched based on the number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display. In the first embodiment, "0" and "1" are set as the special figure strange P status, and when one of the special figure strange P statuses is set in the normal game state and the first time saving state In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display is executed a specific number of times, it is switched to the other one. Then, when the other special figure odd P status is set, when the special figure 1 variable display is executed a specific number of times, it is switched to one side. In this way, in the normal game state and the first time saving state, unless you win a jackpot, the special chart 1 variable P status will change between "0" and "1" every time the special chart 1 variable display is executed a specific number of times. toggle alternately. In addition, although the specific number of times matched with the switching of special figure 1 change P status can be set suitably, in 1st Embodiment, it is set to 100 times.

Moreover, the special figure 1-hen P status "0" is set as an initial value. That is, when the RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated and the gaming RAM 104 is cleared when power is supplied to the gaming control board 100, the special figure 1 odd P status "0" is set. When setting or switching the special figure 1-hen P status, the game control microcomputer 101 stores a flag representing the special figure 1-hen P status (special figure 1-hen P status flag) in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. Remember.

FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table associated with the non-time saving state and the special figure 1 change P status "0", and FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table that is associated with the special figure 1 variant P status "0", and FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variation pattern determination table in FIG. 1, and FIG. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 50 to 53, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state and special figure 1 change P status further includes the jackpot determination result, the reach determination result, and the number of special figure 1 reservations. is associated with. Specifically, each special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table associated with the gaming state and special figure 1 change P status further includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot) when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. Special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table), special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is a loss and the reach judgment is with reach (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for loss with reach), jackpot judgment is Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (Special figure for hold, low reach, no loss) when the reach judgment result is no reach, and the number of special figure 1 reservations at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is 0 to 2. 1 variation pattern judgment table), the special figure 1 variation pattern when the jackpot judgment result is a loss, the reach judgment result is no reach, and the number of special figure 1 reservations at the start of the special figure 1 variation display is 3 to 4. There is a judgment table (Special chart 1 variation pattern judgment table for reservation, multi-reach, no loss).

Here, regarding the effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern that can be determined in the non-time saving state and the first time saving state according to the first embodiment (specific special figure variation effect flow composition effect) explain. Specific special figure variation production flow composition production includes normal variation, reach, N reach, L reach, and SP reach. The SP reach further includes a 1st SP reach, a 2nd SP reach, and a 3rd SP reach, and the L reach further includes a 1st L reach, a 2nd L reach, and a 3rd L reach.

The first SP reach consists of the SP reach of the basic embodiment. The 2nd SP reach is configured for a predetermined time (10 seconds in the first embodiment) longer than the performance time related to the 1st SP reach, and includes the performance content related to the 1st SP reach and the performance content that is not in the 1st SP reach. Contains. In particular, the content of the animation as a background image displayed on the display unit 50a in the second SP reach includes performance content that is not present in the first SP reach, in addition to the performance content related to the first SP reach, due to the long performance time. It is.

The 3rd SP reach is configured for a predetermined time (10 seconds in the first embodiment) longer than the performance time related to the 2nd SP reach, and includes the performance content related to the 2nd SP reach and the performance content that is not present in the 2nd SP reach. I'm here. In particular, because the animation as a background image displayed on the display unit 50a in the 3rd SP reach has a long production time, in addition to the production content related to the 2nd SP reach, the animation that is displayed on the display unit 50a includes production content that is not present in the 2nd SP reach. There is.

Therefore, the 1st SP reach, the 2nd SP reach, and the 3rd SP reach are in a mutually corresponding relationship, and in the background image G115 for SP reach related to the 1st SP reach, the 2nd SP reach, and the 3rd SP reach, the common subject is baseball. An animation of a confrontation between a pitcher and a batter plays.

The 1st L reach consists of the L reach of the basic embodiment. The 2nd L reach is configured for a predetermined time (10 seconds in the first embodiment) longer than the performance time related to the 1L reach, and includes the performance content related to the 1L reach and the performance content not present in the 1L reach. Contains. In particular, the animation as a background image displayed on the display unit 50a at the 2nd L reach includes, in addition to the performance content related to the 1L reach, content that is not present in the 1L reach, due to the long production time. There is.

The 3rd L reach is configured for a predetermined time (10 seconds in the first embodiment) longer than the performance time related to the 2L reach, and includes the performance content related to the 2L reach and the performance content that is not present in the 2L reach. I'm here. In particular, the animation as a background image displayed on the display unit 50a at the 3rd L reach includes, in addition to the performance content related to the 2L reach, content that is not present in the 2L reach, due to the long production time. There is.

Therefore, the 1st L reach, the 2nd L reach, and the 3rd L reach are in a mutually corresponding relationship, and in the L reach background image G114 related to the 1st L reach, the 2nd L reach, and the 3rd L reach, the common subject is the main character. An animation is played in which the character confesses his feelings to the girl character.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 53, in the non-time saving state and in the special figure 1 change P status "0", the 1st SP reach and the 1L reach may be executed. Similarly, in the first time saving state and the special map 1 change P status "0", the 2nd SP reach or the 2nd L reach may be executed. In addition, in the non-time saving state and the special map 1 change P status "1", the 3rd SP reach or the 3rd L reach may be executed. Furthermore, in the first time saving state and the special map 1 odd P status "1", the 1st SP reach, the 2nd SP reach, the 3rd SP reach, the 1st L reach, the 2nd L reach, and the 3rd L reach may be executed.

Next, the special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process according to the first embodiment. The game control microcomputer 101 performs processing for switching the special symbol 1-variant P status in the special symbol determination process, in other words, performs processing for controlling and managing the special symbol 1-variant P status. In addition, the part of the process for controlling and managing the special symbol 1 change P status in the flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process shown in FIG. When the variable display is executed, the processing contents may be changed as appropriate to the extent that it can be switched to the other special figure 1-hen P status.

In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special Operation counter = 0), it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is confirmed (S1751). If the game control microcomputer 101 does not end the stop display of the special symbol (NO in S1751), it ends the special symbol confirmation process, and if it ends the stop display of the special symbol (YES in S1751), the current stop display It is determined whether the special symbol present is a jackpot symbol (S1752).

If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1752 that it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1753, whereas if it determines that it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1752), it resets the gaming state in step S1769. (Transition to normal gaming state). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the high probability flag and the time saving flag, and sets the values of the high probability remaining number of times counter and the time saving remaining number of times counter to "0".

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1770), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1771), and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in accordance with the type of the jackpot symbol. The jackpot opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) in step S1753. If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1753), the process proceeds to step S1767, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1753), it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1754). Note that the time saving flag includes a first time saving flag indicating a first time saving state and a second time saving flag indicating a second time saving state. The second time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area when the second time saving state is set in response to the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the first time-saving flag is turned ON in the time-saving flag area when the special symbol being stopped and displayed is the losing symbol B, as will be described later.

If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1754 that it is in a time saving state (YES in S1754), the process proceeds to step S1760, whereas if it determines that it is not currently in a time saving state (NO in S1754), it proceeds to the next step in step S1755. The remaining number of times the special figure 1-hen P status can be displayed until the special figure 1-hen P status is switched (remaining number of special figure 1-hen P statuses: in Figure 54, "remaining number of switching times"). The value of the counter is subtracted by "1" (S1755), and it is determined whether the value of the special map 1-change P status remaining number counter is "0" (S1756). That is, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1756 whether the remaining number of times of the special figure 1-change P status is "0" (this is the timing to switch the special figure 1-change P status). In addition, the remaining number of times of the special figure 1 change P status is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1756 that the value of the special figure 1 variant P status remaining number counter (special figure 1 variant P status remaining number of times) is not "0" (NO in S1756), the process proceeds to step S1758. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 odd P status remaining number of times counter (special figure 1 odd P status remaining number of times) is "0" (YES in S1756), in step S1757, the currently set special figure 1 Switching from the odd P status to the other special figure 1 odd P status, the process proceeds to step S1758. Specifically, in step S1757, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the currently set special figure 1-hen P status flag to the special figure 1-hen P status flag indicating the special figure 1-hen P status after the change. Switch. Furthermore, at this time, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates a specific number of times (100 times in the first embodiment), which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display that switches the special figure 1-hen P status, to the remaining number of special figure 1-hen P statuses. Set it on the counter.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol B in step S1758. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a losing symbol B (NO in S1758), the process proceeds to step S1767, whereas if it determines that it is a losing symbol B (YES in S1758), the process proceeds to step S1759. The gaming state related to the ease of winning is shifted to the first time-saving state, and the process advances to step S1767. Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 101 turns on the time saving flag (first time saving flag) indicating the first time saving state in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to transition to the first time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets the specified number of time saving times (100 times in the first embodiment) related to the first time saving state in the remaining time saving number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the first time saving state (the first time saving flag is ON) is in step S1760. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not in the first time saving state (NO in S1760), it proceeds to step S1764, while if it determines that it is currently in the first time saving state (NO in S1760), in step S1761, The value of the 1-change P status remaining number counter is subtracted by "1", and in step S1762, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1-change P status remaining number of times counter is "0". That is, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1762 whether the remaining number of times of the special figure 1 odd P status is "0" (this is the timing to switch the special figure 1 odd P status).

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1762 that the value of the special figure 1 variant P status remaining number counter (special figure 1 variant P status remaining number of times) is not "0" (NO in S1762), the process proceeds to step S1764. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 odd P status remaining count counter (special figure 1 odd P status remaining number of times) is "0" (YES in S1762), in step S1763, the currently set special figure 1 Switching from the odd P status to the other special figure 1 odd P status, the process proceeds to step S1763. Specifically, in step S1763, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the currently set special figure 1-hen P status flag to the special figure 1-hen P status flag indicating the special figure 1-hen P status after the change. Switch. Furthermore, at this time, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates a specific number of times (100 times in the first embodiment), which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display that switches the special figure 1-hen P status, to the remaining number of special figure 1-hen P statuses. Set it on the counter.

In step S1764, the gaming control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving), and in step S1765, the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0". Determine whether or not. That is, in step S1765, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the remaining time saving number is "0" and it is the timing to end the time saving state and enter the non-time saving state.

If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1765 that the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining time saving) is not "0" (NO in S1765), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1767, and the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining time saving) If it is determined that the number of times) is "0" (YES in S1765), the time saving flag is turned OFF in step S1766, the time saving state (first time saving state/second time saving state) is shifted to the non-time saving state, and step Proceed to S1767.

In step S1767, the gaming control microcomputer 101 checks the current gaming state based on the ON/OFF of the high probability flag and the ON/OFF of the time saving flag, and sends the gaming state command indicating the gaming state to the output buffer. Then, the special operation status is changed to "1" and the special symbol confirmation process is completed.

Here, the general game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained starting from the normal game state and the normal performance mode. In the normal game state, a game is basically played in which the game ball is fired with a left-handed hit and the player aims to win a jackpot with the variable display of the special figure 1 based on the prize winning in the first starting hole 11. In the normal game state and the normal performance mode, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 variable display and a jackpot game is executed, a second time saving state is entered. Here, regardless of whether the gaming state related to the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot judgment after the jackpot game is a high probability state or a normal probability state, it is at least the second time saving state, so basically the game ball A game is played in which the player aims to win a jackpot by firing a right-handed shot and displaying a special figure 2 variable display based on winning in the second starting port 12. Therefore, by winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state, the operating mode for firing the game ball is switched from left-handed to right-handed.

Further, in the normal game state and the normal production mode, when the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 variable display, the first time saving state is directly entered without the jackpot game being executed. Here, as mentioned above, the first time saving state is a gaming state very similar to the non-time saving state, so even in the first time saving state, basically the game ball is fired left-handed and the first starting port 11 is A game is played in which the player aims to win a jackpot with the variable display of special drawing 1 based on winnings. Therefore, even when switching from the normal gaming state to the first time saving state, the operation mode for firing the game ball continues as a left-handed hit.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the performance in the normal performance mode is executed even in the first time saving state. Further, when switching from a non-time saving state (normal game state) to a first time saving state, the suggestion/notification of the switching is not executed, and the performance in the normal performance mode is continued without interruption. Therefore, even when switching from the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) to the first time saving state, the player feels as if the normal gaming state continues or as if the gaming state has not changed.

Further, the first time-saving state ends when the special symbol variable display is executed a specific number of times without winning a jackpot, and upon this end, the first time-saving state is switched to a non-time-saving state. In this case as well, the switching is not suggested or announced, and the performance in the normal performance mode continues without interruption. Therefore, even when switching from the first time saving state to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), the player feels that the gaming state has not changed.

In this way, if the player continues to be unable to win the jackpot while firing the game ball by hitting left-handed, the game state changes from the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) to the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) without the player noticing. It switches alternately between the 1-hour saving state and the 1-hour saving state. Here, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times) in the non-time saving state and the first time saving state, the special figure 1 variable P status is switched from one to the other. In addition, the switching of the special figure 1 odd P status is not interfered with (not affected) by the switching of the gaming state between the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) and the first time saving state. Therefore, as long as the non-time-saving state (normal gaming state) or the first time-saving state continues, the special figure 1 variable P status changes to "0" and "1" each time the special figure variable display is executed a certain number of times. It switches alternately between. As a result, as a combination of the gaming state related to left-handed hitting and the special figure 1 change P status, the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) and special figure 1 change P status "0", the 1st time saving state and special figure 1 There are four combinations: odd P status "0", non-time saving state (normal gaming state) and special figure 1 odd P status "1", and first time saving state and special figure 1 odd P status "1".

Furthermore, switching from the non-time saving state (normal gaming state) to the first time saving state is performed by determining the losing symbol B in the losing symbol type determination. This losing symbol type determination is executed based on the losing symbol type random number, and the losing symbol type random number is determined by the timing at which it is obtained, so the timing at which the losing symbol B is determined is based on the overall There is irregularity (randomness) in the progress of the game. As a result, the transition between the combinations of the game state related to left-handed hitting and the special figure 1-hen P status will also have irregularities.

Next, a specific example of the transition between the combinations of the game state related to left-handed play and the special figure 1-hen P status according to the progress of the game will be explained. In addition, since the combination of the gaming state related to left-handed hitting and the special figure 1 variation P status constitutes the condition for selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, this combination is referred to as "special figure 1 variation PTBL". "selection conditions". Then, the combination of the non-time saving state and the special figure 1 change P status "0" is set as the special figure 1 change PTBL selection condition "1", and the combination of the first time saving state and the special figure 1 change P status "0" is set as the special figure 1 change PTBL selection condition "1". Figure 1 Variation PTBL selection condition "2", combination of non-time saving state and special figure 1 change P status "1" is set as special figure 1 variation PTBL selection condition "3", first time saving state and special figure 1 change P The combination with status "1" is set as special figure 1 variation PTBL selection condition "4".

FIG. 55(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining transition example 1 of the special figure 1 variation PTBL selection condition, and 55(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining transition example 2 of the special figure 1 variation PTBL selection condition. . In transition example 1 shown in FIG. 55(A) and transition example 2 shown in FIG. 55(B), the gaming RAM 104 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on, and the normal gaming state is first set. At the same time, it is assumed that the situation in which the special figure 1 variable P status "0" is set is the starting point, and thereafter, the special figure variable display continues to be repeatedly executed without winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, as described above, after the gaming RAM 104 is cleared, unless a jackpot is won, the special figure 1 variable P status is alternately switched every time the special figure variable display is executed 100 times. Therefore, in transition examples 1 and 2 shown in FIGS. 55(A) and 55(B), when the special figure variable display is executed 100 times after the gaming RAM 104 is cleared, the special figure 1 change P status is switched from "0" to "1". Furthermore, when the special figure variable display is executed 100 times (when the 200th special figure variable display is completed after the gaming RAM 104 is cleared), the special figure 1 change P status changes from "1" to "0". When the special figure variable display is executed 100 times (when the 300th special figure variable display is completed after the gaming RAM 104 is cleared), the special figure 1 change P status changes from "0". Switches to "1".

In transition example 1 shown in FIG. 55(A), the stop display of losing symbol B is performed in the 150th special symbol variable display after the gaming RAM 104 is cleared, and the state changes from the non-time saving state to the first time saving state, It is assumed that the end condition of the first time saving state is satisfied and the first time saving state becomes a non-time saving state, and thereafter, the stop display of the losing symbol B is not performed. In this case, when the special figure variable display is executed 100 times in the non-time saving state, the special figure 1 change P status will switch from "0" to "1", so the special figure variable display up to that point will be performed 100 times. During the period, special map 1-hen PTBL selection condition = "1".

Then, after the gaming RAM 104 is cleared, the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed at the 150th special symbol variable display (denoted as "losing B" in FIG. 55(A)), so the special symbol 1 change P status " During the period in which the special figure variable display is performed 50 times after switching to ``1'', the special figure 1 variable PTBL selection condition becomes ``3''. Here, the first time-saving state ends when the special figure variable display is displayed 100 times without winning a jackpot, and the first time-saving state changes to a non-time-saving state, so the special figure 1 variable PTBL selection condition = "3". When the special figure variable display is executed 50 times after switching, the special figure 1 variable P status switches from "1" to "0". Therefore, during the period in which the special figure variable display is performed 50 times until this switching, the special figure 1 variant PTBL selection condition = "4", and after that, the special figure variable display from the first time-saving state to the non-time-saving state is 50 times. During the period in which the special drawing 1 variant PTBL selection condition is “2”.

Furthermore, when the special figure variable display is executed 50 times after entering the non-time saving state, the special figure 1 variable P status is switched from "0" to "1". Therefore, during the period in which the special figure variable display is performed 50 times until this switching, the special figure 1 variant PTBL selection condition = "1", and after that, the special figure 1 variant PTBL selection condition = "3".

In transition example 2 shown in FIG. 55(B), the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed in the 75th special symbol variable display after the gaming RAM 104 is cleared ("losing symbol B" is displayed in FIG. 55(B)). (notation), the state changes from the non-time saving state to the first time saving state, the end condition of the first time saving state is satisfied, the first time saving state changes to the non-time saving state, and after that, the 60th time saving state after entering the non-time saving state. Assume that the stop display of losing symbol B is performed in the special symbol variable display. In this case, when the special figure variable display is executed 75 times in the non-time-saving state, the non-time-saving state changes to the first time-saving state, so the period during which the special figure variable display is performed 75 times is the special figure 1 change. PTBL selection condition = "1". Next, when the special map variable display is executed 25 times after the special map 1-hen PTBL selection condition is switched to "1", the special map 1-hen P status will switch from "0" to "1", so the During the period in which the special figure variable display is performed 25 times, the special figure 1-variant PTBL selection condition = "2", and when the change occurs, the special figure 1-variant PTBL selection condition switches from "2" to "4".

Then, when the special map variable display is executed 100 times after the special map 1-hen P status switches from "0" to "1", the special map 1-hen P status switches from "1" to "0". Before that, specifically, when the special figure variable display is executed 75 times after the special figure 1 variable P status switches from "0" to "1", the game state related to left-handed hitting is the first time saving state. It becomes a non-time saving state. Therefore, during the period in which the special figure variable display is performed 75 times before entering this non-time-saving state, the special figure 1-variable PTBL selection condition = "4", and when the time-saving state is entered, the special figure 1-variable PTBL selection condition is Switches from "4" to "3".

Furthermore, in transition example 2 shown in FIG. 55(B), the stop display of losing symbol B is performed in the 60th special symbol variable display after entering the non-time saving state ("losing symbol B" in FIG. 55(B)). ), the state changes from the non-time saving state to the first time saving state, but before that, specifically, when the special figure variable display is executed 25 times after changing from the first time saving state to the non-time saving state, Figure 1 Change P status switches from "1" to "0". Therefore, during the period in which the special figure variable display is performed 25 times until the special figure 1-hen P status switches to "0", the special figure 1-hen PTBL selection condition = "3", and the special figure 1-hen P status changes to "0". ”, the special map 1-hen PTBL selection condition switches from “3” to “1”.

Then, after the special figure 1-hen PTBL selection condition is switched from "3" to "1", the period during which the special figure variable display is executed 35 times until the first time saving state is reached is the special figure 1-hen PTBL selection condition = When it becomes "1" and enters the first time saving state, the special map 1-variant PTBL selection condition switches from "1" to "2".

Furthermore, when the special map variable display is executed 65 times after the special map 1-hen PTBL selection condition switches from "1" to "2", the special map 1-hen P status switches from "0" to "1". . Therefore, during the period in which the special figure variable display is performed 65 times, the special figure 1 variant PTBL selection condition = "2", and when the change occurs, the special figure 1 variant PTBL selection condition changes from "2" to "4". Switch.

When the special map variable display is executed 100 times after the special map 1-hen P status switches from "0" to "1", the special map 1-hen P status switches from "1" to "0", but before that Specifically, when the special figure variable display is executed 35 times after the special figure 1 variable P status switches from "0" to "1", the game state related to left-handed hitting changes from the first time-saving state to non-player. Time will be shortened. Therefore, during the period in which the special figure variable display is performed 35 times before entering this non-time-saving state, the special figure 1-variable PTBL selection condition = "4", and when the non-time-saving state is entered, the special figure 1-variable PTBL selection condition is Switches from "4" to "3".

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (a specific result is derived) in the variable display of the special symbol (identification information), the jackpot is advantageous to the player. When a game (specific game) is executed and a loss pattern B, which is different from the jackpot pattern, is stopped and displayed (a predetermined result is derived) in the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) in the normal gaming state, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed. The first time-saving state (specific gaming state), which is different from the normal gaming state, is set without executing the There are 1-hen P status "0" (first category) and special symbol 1-hen P status "1" (second category). Each time the variable display of information) is executed 100 times (predetermined number of times), either the special map 1-hen P status "0" (first category) or the special map 1-hen P status "1" (second category) When the normal gaming state and special drawing 1 odd P status is "0" (first category), when the normal gaming state and special drawing 1 odd P status is "1" (second category), 1 time saving state (specific gaming state) (specific gaming state) and special figure 1 change P status "0" (first classification), and 1st time saving state (specific game state) and special figure 1 change P status "1" ” (second category), the special figure fluctuation time is determined based on a different special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (condition). Therefore, the special figure variation time, which is the basis of the special figure variation effect which is the main effect in the pachinko game machine PY1, changes irregularly. As a result, the game becomes more interesting and the game including the performance can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In addition, the first time saving state is closer to the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) than the second time saving state in terms of ease of winning the second start opening 12 (ease of opening). As a result, in the first time saving state, the player basically plays the game by firing the game ball left-handed. Therefore, even if the normal gaming state transitions to the first time saving state, or even if the first time saving state changes to the normal gaming state, the player continues to play a game in which the game ball is fired with left-handed batting, and while This can effectively prevent games including performances from becoming monotonous. Furthermore, the switching of the special figure 1 change P status is performed based on the number of executions of the special figure change display, so it occurs regularly, but the transition from the normal gaming state to the first time saving state is the change of the losing symbol B. Since this is done based on the stop display, it occurs irregularly. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent games including effects from becoming monotonous.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the first embodiment, the prescribed number of times of time saving in the first time saving state is 100 times, but the specific number of times of prescribed time saving is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate. Further, in the first embodiment, there is one type of prescribed number of times of time saving in the first time saving state, 100 times, but there may be two or more types of prescribed number of times of time saving in the first time saving state. In this case, for example, a plurality of types of losing symbols related to the first time saving state may be set, and the prescribed number of times saving time may be different depending on the type of losing symbols.

In addition, in the first embodiment, switching of the special figure 1 variable P status is performed every time the special figure variable display is performed 100 times in the normal game state or the first time saving state, but this number of times is It is not limited to the form and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the number of executions of the special figure variable display related to switching of the special figure 1 change P status is one type of 100 times, but there may be two or more types. In this case, for example, when a certain special figure 1-hen P status is switched, the number of executions of the special figure variable display in order to switch the next special figure 1-hen P status is set to a plurality of times (for example, 50 100 times, 150 times) may be repeatedly determined by a predetermined lottery. Alternatively, when transitioning from the first time saving state to the normal gaming state, the number of executions of the special symbol variable display related to switching the special symbol 1 variable P status until the next jackpot gaming state is set to a plurality of times (for example, 50 The number may be determined by a predetermined lottery from among 100 times, 150 times).

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, there are two types of special map 1-hen P status, but there may be three or more types. In this case, for example, the order in which the special map 1-hen P status changes may be set in advance. Alternatively, each time an opportunity to switch the special map 1-hen P status arrives, it may be determined by a predetermined lottery from among a plurality of items.

In addition, the probability of winning in the hit determination related to the first time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game are not limited to the first embodiment, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 is not limited to the first embodiment. Regarding the ease of winning (opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time), the first time saving state is closer to the normal gaming state than the first time saving state, and in the first time saving state, the player hits the game ball left-handed. As long as it is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which the player is fired (the player is not disadvantaged), it may be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the special figure 1 change P status is switched based on the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but the trigger for the switching is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but can be changed as appropriate. It's okay. For example, as a trigger for switching the special figure 1-hen P status, the time, the elapsed time since the start of the game, the number of winnings in the starting ports 11 and 12, the number of game balls fired, and the game balls ejected from the out port 19. , the number of game balls that have passed through the gate 13, or the number of times a particular performance has occurred.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the second embodiment will mainly be described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

FIG. 56 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 56, the pachinko gaming machine PY2 includes a front door 23 that is different from the basic embodiment. In the front door 23 of the pachinko game machine PY2, speakers 52 having a structure different from the basic embodiment are provided at the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the front door 23. Further, on the front door 23 of the pachinko gaming machine PY2, a frame lamp 53 having a structure different from that of the basic embodiment is arranged so as to intermittently surround the upper side, left side, and right side of the transparent plate 23t of the front door 23. ing. Further, on the left side of the lower plate 35, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed backward is arranged.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY2, a frame movable body 56 is installed at the right end of the upper surface of the upper tray 34. The frame movable body 56 is formed into a vertically long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its back surface is connected to the front lower right part of the front door 23 and is integrated with the front door 23.

A light emitting section 56h capable of emitting light in various colors is arranged on the entire front surface of a frame movable body main body 56k forming the main body of the frame movable body 56. Note that predetermined characters ``Omikuji'' are written on the front surface of the light emitting portion 56h.

Although the frame movable body main body 56k is fixed at that position, a plurality of movable parts 56f configured to be able to appear are housed in the frame movable body main body 56k. As the plurality of movable parts 56f, a first movable part 56f1, a second movable part 56f2, a third movable part 56f3, and a fourth movable part 56f4 are housed in the frame movable body 56k. The first movable part 56f1, the second movable part 56f2, the third movable part 56f3, and the fourth movable part 56f4 are formed into the same vertically long rectangular plate shape, and in the standby state, they are not visible to the player in the front and rear directions. They are housed in the frame movable body main body 56k in a state where they are lined up.

Each of the first movable part 56f1, the second movable part 56f2, the third movable part 56f3, and the fourth movable part 56f4 is configured to be able to independently rise to a predetermined operating position that is easily visible to the player. ing. Here, the situation when the first movable part 56f1, the second movable part 56f2, the third movable part 56f3, and the fourth movable part 56f4 rise to predetermined operating positions will be described using FIG. FIG. 57(A) is a front view of the frame movable body 56 in a standby state, and FIG. 57(B) is a front view of the frame movable body 56 in a state where the first movable portion 56f1 has been raised to a predetermined operating position. 57(C) is a front view of the frame movable body 56 with the second movable portion 56f2 raised to a predetermined operating position, and FIG. 57(D) is a front view of the frame movable body 56 with the third movable portion 56f3 raised to a predetermined operating position. FIG. 57E is a front view of the frame movable body 56 in a state where it has been raised to the position, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 57(B) to 57(E), the predetermined characters "Daikichi" are displayed on the front of the first movable part 56f1, and the predetermined characters "Daikichi" are displayed on the front of the second movable part 56f2. is displayed, and a picture representing a normal Great Buddha is displayed on the front of the third movable part 56f3, and a special picture of a Great Buddha is displayed on the front of the fourth movable part 56f4, specifically a picture of a Great Buddha with a baseball in his left hand. A picture representing the is displayed. Furthermore, the entire front surface of the first movable portion 56f1 is painted blue as the background color of the predetermined characters “Daikichi”, and the entire front surface of the second movable portion 56f2 is painted green as the background color of the predetermined characters “Daikichi”. The entire front surface of the third movable portion 56f3 is colored red as the background color for a picture representing a normal Great Buddha, and the entire front surface of the fourth movable portion 56f4 is colored gold as a background color for a picture representing a special Great Buddha. has been done.

Next, a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board 120 side is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the various actuators connected to the production control board 120 include a first movable part motor 56m1, a second movable part motor 56m2, a third movable part motor 56m3, and a fourth movable part motor 56m2. Includes 56m4 motor. The first movable part motor 56m1, the second movable part motor 56m2, the third movable part motor 56m3, and the fourth movable part motor 56m4 are the back surface of the front frame 23m that corresponds to the frame movable body main body 56k in the front and back direction. It is electrically connected to the first movable part 56f1, the second movable part 56f2, the third movable part 56f3, and the fourth movable part 56f4 by wiring or the like.

The first movable part motor 56m1 drives the first movable part 56f1 to raise the first movable part 56f1 to a predetermined operating position, and to return the first movable part 56f1 from the predetermined operating position to a storage position in a standby state. be. The second movable part motor 56m2 can drive the second movable part 56f2 to raise the second movable part 56f2 to a predetermined operating position and return it from the predetermined operating position to a storage position in a standby state. be. The third movable part motor 56m3 drives the third movable part 56f3 to raise the third movable part 56f3 to a predetermined operating position and return it from the predetermined operating position to a storage position in a standby state. be. The fourth movable part motor 56m4 drives the fourth movable part 56f4 to raise the fourth movable part 56f4 to a predetermined operating position, and to return the fourth movable part 56f4 from the predetermined operating position to a storage position in a standby state. be.

The production control microcomputer 121 includes operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the first movable section 56f1, operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the second movable section 56f2, operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the third movable section 56f3, and Operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the fourth movable section 56f4 is created, and via the sub-drive board 162, the operation of the first movable section 56f1, the operation of the second movable section 56f2, the operation of the third movable section 56f3, and Controls the operation of the fourth movable part 56f4.

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the light emission of the light emitting section 56h via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the light emission section 56h, and controls the light emission section 56h according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data of the light emitting unit 56h.

Various switches connected to the production control board 120 include a frame movable body sensor 56a. The frame movable body sensor 56a detects that the frame movable body main body 56k is touched. When the frame movable body main body 56k detects that it has been operated, it outputs a signal according to the detected content to the production control board 120.

Next, a performance using the frame movable body 56 that can be executed by the pachinko game machine PY2 will be explained. In the normal performance mode, the pachinko gaming machine PY2 may perform a pre-read performance using the frame movable body 56 based on the first start winning command. Note that, hereinafter, the look-ahead effect using the frame movable body 56 will be referred to as a "specific look-ahead effect." The specific look-ahead effect is executed using the image display device 50 in addition to the frame movable body 56.

FIGS. 59 to 60 are diagrams showing specific examples of specific prefetch effects. Note that FIGS. 59 to 60 schematically show the display section 50a and the frame movable body 56 in extracted form. In the second embodiment, the specific look-ahead effect is executed in response to winning in the first start opening 11 that can execute the special figure 1 variable display, in other words, in response to the occurrence of special figure 1 reservation. For example, as shown in FIG. 59(A), in a situation where there is one special figure 1 pending and the variable display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (variable display of special figure 1) is being executed, the special figure 1 pending is It is assumed that a specific look-ahead effect is executed in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 reservation. Note that the icon HA1 displayed in FIG. 59(A) and the pending icon HA2 representing special figure 1 pending in the pending order 1 are displayed in a normal manner.

When a special figure 1 hold that is a target of a specific look-ahead effect occurs, as shown in FIG. HA3) is displayed in a special manner associated with a specific prefetch effect. In the second embodiment, the special aspect represents the frame movable body 56 in a standby state. Further, as a specific look-ahead effect, as soon as the hold icon HA3 in a special mode is displayed, the light emitting portion 56h of the frame movable body 56 lights up in white, as shown in FIG. 59(B). In the second embodiment, the white lighting of the light emitting unit 56h related to the specific look-ahead effect continues for a predetermined period of time (10 seconds).

Then, as shown in FIG. 59(C), when the player touches the frame movable body main body 56k while the light emitting part 56h is emitting light, the screen shown in FIGS. 60(A-1) and 60(B-1) , FIG. 60 (C-1), and FIG. 60 (D-1), any one of the first movable portion 56f1 to the fourth movable portion 56f4 operates and a predetermined movement is made so that the player can visually confirm the movement. Raise to operating position. Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (A-2), FIG. 60 (B-2), FIG. 60 (C-2), and FIG. 60 (D-2), the hold icon was displayed in a special manner. HA3 changes to a mode representing any one of the activated first movable portion 56f1 to fourth movable portion 56f4.

Note that hereinafter, the display mode representing the first movable portion 56f1 to the fourth movable portion 56f4 after changing from the special mode will be referred to as a “special mode”. Furthermore, the special aspect representing the first movable part 56f1 is referred to as a "first special aspect", the special aspect representing the second movable part 56f2 is referred to as a "second special aspect", and the special aspect representing the third movable part 56f3 is referred to as a "second special aspect". This will be referred to as a "third special aspect," and the special aspect representing the fourth movable portion 56f4 will be referred to as a "fourth special aspect."

Furthermore, as the performance type of the specific look-ahead performance (specific look-ahead performance type), the one in which the first movable part 56f1 is activated and the hold icon of the first special mode is displayed is referred to as the "first specific look-ahead performance", and the second The operation in which the movable part 56f2 operates and the hold icon of the second special mode is displayed is referred to as a "second specific look-ahead effect", and the third movable part 56f3 operates and the hold icon of the third special mode is displayed. This is referred to as a "third specific pre-read effect", and the one in which the fourth movable part 56f4 is activated and the hold icon of the fourth special mode is displayed is referred to as a "fourth specific pre-read effect".

The details will be described later, but there is a possibility that a specific look-ahead effect will be judged as a jackpot based on the jackpot determination related to the suspension of a specific look-ahead effect, in other words, there is a possibility that it will become a jackpot game state based on the hold of a specific look-ahead effect. It is a suggestive performance. The specific look-ahead performance type indicates the magnitude relationship of the possibility of a jackpot game state. Specifically, there is a high possibility that a jackpot game state will occur in the order of the first specific pre-read effect < the second specific pre-read effect < the third specific pre-read effect < the fourth specific pre-read effect.

In addition, after the light emitting part 56h emits white light, the light emitting part 56h is turned off when the frame movable body main body 56k is touched while the light is being emitted. Further, the first movable part 56f1 to the fourth movable part 56f4, which have risen to a predetermined operating position upon contact with the frame movable body main body 56k, are held at that position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), and As time passes, it will descend and return to the standby position. Even after the first movable part 56f1 to the fourth movable part 56f4 return to the standby position, the special mode of the hold icon is maintained, and the hold icon is used for execution of the special figure 1 variable display corresponding to the specific pre-read effect target hold. Accordingly, the icon remains in the special mode.

In addition, after the light emitting unit 56h emits white light, in other words, after the specific look-ahead effect is started, if a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) passes without any contact with the frame movable body 56k that is emitting light, , the light emitting section 56h is turned off. In the second embodiment, even if the frame movable body main body 56k is contacted after this, the movable portion 56f does not operate. In other words, the period during which the light emitting section 56h emits white light is the valid period of operation for operating the movable section 50f in the specific look-ahead effect, and the white light emission of the light emitting section 56h causes the movable section 50f to operate in the specific look-ahead effect. This indicates that the operation is valid for activation.

Next, an example of the control contents related to the specific prefetch effect in the second embodiment will be explained. In addition, since the control content explained below is an example of the control content related to the specific look-ahead effect, the control content is not limited to the following content, and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not it is the normal production mode in step S4302. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the production mode is not the normal production mode, it finishes the processing related to the specific pre-read production, and when it determines that the production control mode is the normal production mode, the received start winning command corresponds to special drawing 1 pending. Determine whether it exists or not. If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the starting winning command is not the starting winning command (first starting winning command) corresponding to the special drawing 1 pending, it finishes the processing related to the specific look-ahead production and issuing the starting winning command corresponding to the special drawing 1 pending. (first starting winning command), based on the starting winning command, a specific pre-reading effect execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to execute the specific pre-reading effect.

The specific pre-read effect execution determination is executed with reference to the specific pre-read effect execution determination table. FIG. 61(A) shows an example of the configuration of the specific look-ahead effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 61(A), the specific pre-read performance execution determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern included in the pre-read determination result indicated by the start winning command. Specifically, the specific look-ahead effect execution determination table includes a specific look-ahead effect execution determination table for SP jackpot fluctuations, a specific look-ahead effect execution determination table for L jackpot fluctuations, a specific look-ahead effect execution determination table for SP loss fluctuations, and L. A specific look-ahead performance execution determination table for loss variation, a specific look-ahead performance execution determination table for N loss variation, and a specific look-ahead performance execution determination table for normal loss variation are provided. Each specific pre-read effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 61(A) is configured as appropriate so that the selection rate for executing/not executing the specific pre-read effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 61(A). There is.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), it may be determined to "execute" both when the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the start winning command is a jackpot variation and a loss variation. Therefore, when the specific pre-read effect is executed, there is a possibility of a jackpot in the special figure variable display (specific pre-read effect target variation) based on the special figure 1 reservation that triggered the specific pre-read effect. That is, the specific look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state. In addition, it may be determined to "execute" both when the special figure variation pattern indicated by the start winning command is a special figure variation related to reach establishment, and when it is a special figure variation where reach is not established. Therefore, when the specific look-ahead performance is executed, there is a possibility that a reach may be achieved with the special figure variation performance (specific look-ahead performance target variation performance) according to the specific look-ahead performance target variation. In other words, the specific look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of becoming a reach.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 finishes the specific pre-read performance execution determination, it determines whether or not the determination result is "execute the specific pre-read performance". The performance control microcomputer 121 finishes the processing related to the specific pre-reading performance when the determination result is not "Execute the specific pre-reading performance", and when the determination result is "Execute the specific pre-reading performance", the microcomputer 121 Based on the start winning command, a specific pre-read performance type determination is performed to determine the specific pre-read performance type.

The specific pre-read effect type determination is executed with reference to the specific pre-read effect type determination table. An example of the configuration of the specific look-ahead effect type determination table is shown in FIG. 61(B). As shown in FIG. 61(B), the specific prefetch performance type determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the specific look-ahead performance type determination table includes a specific look-ahead performance type determination table for SP jackpot fluctuations, a specific look-ahead performance type determination table for L jackpot fluctuations, a specific look-ahead performance type determination table for SP loss fluctuations, and L. A specific look-ahead performance type determination table for loss fluctuations, a specific look-ahead performance type determination table for N loss fluctuations, and a specific look-ahead performance type determination table for normal loss fluctuations are provided. Each specific pre-read effect type determination table shown in FIG. 61(B) is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each specific pre-read effect type becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 61(B).

As shown in Figure 61 (B), when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is SP reach fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation, SP loss fluctuation), L reach fluctuation (L jackpot fluctuation, L loss fluctuation), and N loss fluctuation. Even in the case of a normal loss variation, the "first specific look-ahead effect", "second specific look-ahead effect", "third specific look-ahead effect", and "fourth specific look-ahead effect" may be determined. Therefore, when a first specific look-ahead performance, a second specific look-ahead performance, a third specific look-ahead performance, or a fourth specific look-ahead performance is executed as a specific look-ahead performance, a reach can be achieved with the specific look-ahead performance target variation performance. There is a possibility that N reach will develop into SP reach or L reach, and there is a possibility of hitting the jackpot. That is, the first specific look-ahead performance, the second specific look-ahead performance, the third specific look-ahead performance, or the fourth specific look-ahead performance is the possibility that a reach will be established, the possibility that N reach will develop into SP reach, or L reach, This is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of hitting the jackpot.

In addition, in the case of SP reach variation (SP jackpot variation, SP loss variation), L reach variation (L jackpot variation, L loss variation), and N loss variation, the "4th specific look-ahead effect" is determined. However, in the case of a change in loss, the "fourth specific look-ahead performance" is not normally determined. Therefore, when the fourth specific look-ahead performance is executed, it is determined that a reach is established (develops into a reach) with the specific look-ahead performance target variation performance. That is, the fourth specific look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that a reach is established (develops into a reach).

Furthermore, in the case of SP reach variation (SP jackpot variation, SP loss variation), L reach variation (L jackpot variation, L loss variation), and N loss variation, the "4th specific look-ahead effect" is determined. However, compared to the cases of SP reach variation and L reach variation, the probability of determining the "fourth specific look-ahead performance" in the case of N loss variation is extremely low. Therefore, when the fourth specific look-ahead performance is executed, there is a possibility that it will not develop into SP reach or L reach in the specific look-ahead performance target variation performance, but there is a high possibility that it will develop into SP reach or L reach. That is, the fourth specific look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that although there is a possibility that it will not develop into SP reach or L reach, there is a high possibility that it will develop into SP reach or L reach.

Further, according to the specific look-ahead performance type determination table shown in FIG. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game will become a jackpot game.

The performance control microcomputer 121 performs a specific pre-read performance type determination, and then sets a command (specific pre-read performance start command) indicating the specific pre-read performance type that is the result of the determination in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124, and also 56h is emitted to start a specific look-ahead performance.

The specific prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004). When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the specific prefetch effect start command, it causes the display unit 50a to start a specific prefetch effect of the specific prefetch effect type indicated by the specific prefetch effect start command. Specifically, the image CPU 141 first displays, in a special manner, a hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 hold related to the specific look-ahead effect start command.

Then, when the production control microcomputer 121 receives a detection signal from the frame movable body sensor 56a indicating that the frame movable body main body 56k has been touched while the light emission unit 56h is emitting light, the production control microcomputer 121 turns off the light emission unit 56h. At the same time, the movable part 56f corresponding to the specific pre-read performance type that is the result of the specific pre-read effect type determination is raised to a predetermined operating position, and a command indicating that the frame movable body main body 56k has been touched (frame movable body main body (contact command) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

The frame movable body contact command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004). When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the frame movable body contact command, it changes the hold icon in the special mode to a special mode corresponding to the specific look-ahead effect type indicated by the specific look-ahead effect start command on the display unit 50a. let

Next, a specific preview performance that can be executed by the pachinko game machine PY2 in the normal performance mode will be explained. The specific notice performance is executed in the special pattern variation performance corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation pattern based on the special pattern 1 variation pattern, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the special pattern 1 variable display based on the special pattern 1 variation pattern. In other words, this is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the special figure 1 variable display will result in a jackpot. Further, the specific preview performance is performed using the image display device 50 and the speaker 52. That is, the specific preview performance includes an image displayed on the display section 50a and a sound output from the speaker 52.

FIGS. 62 to 64 are diagrams showing specific examples of specific preview effects. Note that FIGS. 62 to 64 schematically show the display section 50a and the speaker 52 extracted. In the second embodiment, the specific preview performance is executed in response to execution of the special figure 1 variable display. For example, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the specific preview performance is started when a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 was started.

When the specific preview performance is started, first, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the image G30 (specific preview performance image G30) associated with the specific preview performance is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. will be displayed in the background image that was previously displayed. Different characters are displayed in each of the four areas divided vertically and horizontally into the specific preview effect image G30 displayed on the entire display section 50a. Specifically, the character V is displayed in the upper left of the specific preview performance image G30, the character W is displayed in the upper right of the specific preview performance image G30, the character X is displayed in the lower left of the specific preview performance image G30, and the character Character Y is displayed at the lower right of the preview performance image G30. Each of the characters V, W, X, and Y has been performing an action associated with each character since the specific preview effect image G30 was displayed.

Note that the specific preview performance image G30 is colored appropriately. In addition, in the following, the action associated with character V will be referred to as the "first specific preview performance action", the action associated with character W will be referred to as the "second specific preview performance action", and the action associated with character W will be referred to as the "second specific preview performance action". The action associated with X may be referred to as a "third specific preview performance action", and the action associated with character Y may be referred to as a "fourth specific preview performance action". In the second embodiment, the contents of the first to fourth specific preview performance operations are set to be different from each other.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the color specific preview effect image G30 is displayed (at the first timing), as shown in FIG. The movements of all characters (character V, character W, character X, and character Y) stop. Note that the actions of all the characters are continuously executed until a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the specific preview effect image G30 was displayed. Further, in the following, "a performance in which the movements of a plurality of characters that are the main actors of a plurality of performances stop" that constitutes a specific preview performance in this way may be referred to as a "stop performance."

Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the movements of all the characters related to the specific preview effect image G30 have stopped (the stop effect has been performed), the second timing after the first timing has passed. Depending on the timing), the performance content of the specific preview performance will diverge. Specifically, the name of the character related to the specific preview performance is outputted from the speaker 52 as the specific preview performance sound, and in response to the output of the specific preview performance sound, the name of the character related to the specific preview performance image G30 is outputted as the specific preview performance sound outputted in the specific preview performance image G30. The action of the corresponding character resumes. In other words, the character that will resume its action is announced in advance by a specific preview effect sound. In the following, ``the performance that announces in advance the character who will resume the action using the specific preview performance audio'' that constitutes the specific preview performance will be referred to as ``advance notification performance'', and the ``target of the advance notification performance'' that constitutes the specific preview performance. A performance in which a certain character resumes an action is sometimes referred to as a "resumption performance."

The types of characters related to the specific preview production sound (characters targeted for advance notice production) and characters whose actions resume (characters targeted for restart production) are character V, character W, character X, character Y, and character. There are seven types: V and character W, character X and character Y, and all characters (character V, character W, character X, and character Y). That is, there are seven branching patterns (development patterns) after the movements of all the characters related to the specific preview effect image G30 have stopped (the stop effect has been performed).

In the following, the type of specific preview performance (specific preview performance type) in the case where the character targeted by the specific preview performance audio and who restarts the action is character V will be referred to as the first specific preview performance. Similarly, the specific notice performance type for the character W is the second specific notice performance, the specific notice performance type for the character X is the third specific notice performance, and the specific notice performance type for the character Y is the second special notice performance type. This will be the fourth special preview performance. In addition, the specific preview performance type in the case of characters V and character W is set as the 5th specific preview performance, the specific preview performance type in the case of characters X and character Y is set as the 6th specific preview performance, and the The specific preview performance type is set as the seventh specific preview performance.

Further, the specific preview performance audio related to the first specific preview performance will be referred to as the first specific preview performance audio. Similarly, the specific notice performance sounds related to the second specific notice performance, the third specific notice performance, the fourth specific notice performance, the fifth specific notice performance, the sixth specific notice performance, and the seventh specific notice performance are changed to the second specific notice performance. They are referred to as production sound, third specific notice production sound, fourth specific notice production sound, fifth specific notice production sound, sixth specific notice production sound, and seventh specific notice production sound.

In the second embodiment, the first specific preview performance audio is composed of the voice "Character V", the second specific preview performance audio is composed of the voice "Character W", and the third specific preview performance audio is "Character V". The fourth specific notice presentation sound consists of the sound "Character The effect sound is composed of the voice "Character X, Character Y", and the seventh specific preview production sound is composed of the voice "All".

Furthermore, as will be described later, the specific preview performance type suggests the magnitude relationship of the possibility of a jackpot game state. Specifically, the jackpot is won in the following order: 1st special notice performance < 2nd special notice performance < 3rd special notice performance < 4th special notice performance < 5th special notice performance < 6th special notice performance < 7th special notice performance Indicates that there is a high possibility of entering a gaming state.

Here, the contents of the performance after the motions of all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 in the specific preview performance have stopped (after the stop performance), in other words, specific examples of the advance notice performance and the restart performance will be explained. FIG. 63 (A-1) and FIG. 63 (A-2) are diagrams showing specific examples of the first specific preview effect, and FIG. 63 (B-1) and FIG. 63 (B-2) 63(C-1) and 63(C-2) are diagrams representing specific examples of the case of the third specific preview performance. Yes, FIG. 63 (D-1) and FIG. 63 (D-2) are diagrams showing specific examples of the fourth specific preview performance.

In the first specific preview performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 stopped moving (at a second timing after the first timing), First, as shown in FIG. 63 (A-1), the first specific notice production sound "Character V" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 63 (A-2), the specific notice stops. The character V in the effect image G30 resumes its action.

In the second specific preview performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 stopped moving (at a second timing after the first timing), First, as shown in FIG. 63 (B-1), the second specific notice production sound "Character W" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 63 (B-2), the specific notice stops. The character W in the effect image G30 resumes its action.

In the third specific preview performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 stopped moving (at a second timing after the first timing), First, as shown in FIG. 63 (C-1), the third specific notice presentation sound "Character X" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. The character X in the effect image G30 resumes its action.

In the fourth specific preview performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 stopped moving (at a second timing after the first timing), First, as shown in FIG. 63 (D-1), the fourth specific notice production sound "Character Y" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 63 (D-2), the specific notice stops. Character Y in the effect image G30 resumes its action.

In addition, FIGS. 64(A) and 64(B) show the performance contents after the movements of all characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 in the fifth specific preview performance have stopped (after the stop performance), in other words. , a diagram illustrating a specific example of advance notice performance, and restart performance. In the fifth specific preview performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 stopped moving (at a second timing after the first timing), First, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the fifth specific preview effect sound "Character V, Character W" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 64(B), the specific preview effect image G30 is output. Character V and character Y within resume their movements.

Although not shown, in the sixth specific preview performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 stopped moving (after the first timing), (at the second timing), as in the case of the fourth specific notice performance, the sixth specific notice performance sound “Character X, Character Y” is first output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, Character X and character Y resume their movements.

Although not shown, in the seventh specific preview performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 stopped moving (after the first timing), At the second timing), first, the seventh specific preview effect sound "Everyone" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, character V, character W, character X, and Character Y resumes its action.

In this way, after all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 have stopped their movements, if the content is branched (developed) into a performance involving multiple characters, multiple characters may be displayed in quick succession with one specific preview performance sound. is called (without a pause), and the multiple characters in question resume their movements all at once.

Although not shown, the specific preview performance ends when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the action associated with the character resumed. Upon completion of this, the specific preview performance image G30 is erased, and the normal background image before the start of the specific preview performance is displayed.

Next, an example of the control content related to the specific preview performance in the second embodiment will be explained. Note that the control contents described below are an example of the control contents related to the specific preview performance, so the control contents are not limited to the following contents and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, in step S4306, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not it is the normal performance mode after determining the special symbol variation performance pattern. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the mode is not the normal production mode, it finishes the processing related to the specific notice production, and when it determines that the production mode is the normal production mode, the received special figure variation start command corresponds to the special figure 1 variation pattern. Determine whether or not it is. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure variation start command does not correspond to the special figure 1 variation pattern, it finishes the processing related to the specific notice production and executes the special figure variation start command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation pattern. If it is determined that there is, based on the special figure variation start command, a specific preview performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not the specific preview performance can be executed.

The specific preview performance execution determination is executed with reference to the specific preview performance execution determination table. An example of the configuration of the specific preview performance execution determination table is shown in FIG. 65(A). As shown in FIG. 65(A), the specific advance notice performance execution determination table is associated with the special symbol variation pattern included in the special symbol variation pattern determination result indicated by the special symbol variation start command. Specifically, the specific advance notice performance execution determination table includes a specific advance notice performance execution determination table for jackpot fluctuations (SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation), a specific notice performance execution determination table for SP loss fluctuations, and a specific notice performance execution determination table for L loss fluctuations. Specific notice performance execution determination table, Specific notice performance execution determination table for N loss variation, Specific notice performance execution determination table for normal A loss variation, Specific notice performance execution determination table for normal B loss variation, and Normal C loss variation. A specific preview performance execution determination table is provided for the purpose of the game. Each specific preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 65(A) is configured as appropriate so that the selection rate for executing/not executing the specific preview performance becomes the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 65(A). There is.

As shown in FIG. 65(A), the special pattern variation pattern indicated by the special pattern variation start command may be determined to be "executed" whether it is a jackpot variation or a loss variation. Therefore, when the specific preview performance is executed, there is a possibility that the player will win a jackpot with the special figure 1 variable display that triggered the specific preview performance. That is, the specific preview performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state. In addition, the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command may be determined to be "executed" both in the case of a special figure variation pattern in which a reach is established and in the case of a special figure variation pattern in which a reach is not established. Therefore, when the specific advance notice performance is executed, there is a possibility that a reach can be achieved with the special figure variation performance according to the special figure 1 variable display related to the specific advance notice performance. In other words, the specific preview performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that it will be a reach. In addition, when the special figure 1 variation pattern is a normal B losing variation and a normal C losing variation, the specific advance notice performance is not executed.

After finishing the specific preview performance execution determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the determination result is "execute the specific preview performance". The performance control microcomputer 121 finishes the processing related to the specific preview performance if the determination result is not "Execute the specific preview performance", and if the determination result is "Execute the specific preview performance", the microcomputer 121 executes the process related to the specific preview performance. Based on the special figure variation start command, a specific preview performance type determination is performed to determine the specific preview performance type.

The specific preview performance type determination is executed with reference to the specific preview performance type determination table. An example of the configuration of the specific preview performance type determination table is shown in FIG. 65(B). As shown in FIG. 65(B), the specific preview performance type determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern. Specifically, the specific preview performance type determination table includes a specific preview performance type determination table for jackpot fluctuations (SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation), a specific preview performance type determination table for SP loss fluctuation, and a specific preview performance type determination table for L loss fluctuation. A specific preview performance type determination table, a specific preview performance type determination table for N loss variation, and a specific preview performance type determination table for normal A loss variation are provided. Each specific preview performance type determination table shown in FIG. 65(B) is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each specific preview performance type becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 65(B).

As shown in Fig. 65(B), when the special pattern fluctuation pattern is SP reach fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation, SP loss fluctuation), L reach fluctuation (L jackpot fluctuation, L loss fluctuation), and N loss fluctuation. Even in the case of a normal A loss variation, the "first specific notice performance," "second specific notice performance," "third specific notice performance," and "fourth specific notice performance" may be determined. Therefore, when the first specific notice performance, the second specific notice performance, the third specific notice performance, or the fourth specific notice performance is executed as the specific notice performance, a reach can be achieved with the variable performance targeted for the specific notice performance. There is a possibility that N reach will develop into SP reach or L reach, and there is a possibility of hitting the jackpot. In other words, the first specific preview performance, the second specific preview performance, the third specific advance look performance, or the fourth specific preview performance has a possibility that a reach will be achieved, a possibility that N reach will develop into SP reach, or L reach, This is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of hitting the jackpot.

In addition, in the case of SP reach fluctuations (SP jackpot fluctuations, SP loss fluctuations), L reach fluctuations (L jackpot fluctuations, L loss fluctuations), and N loss fluctuations, "5th specific notice performance", "6th specific However, in the case of an A loss variation, the "fifth specific preview performance" and "sixth specific preview performance" are not normally determined. Therefore, when the fifth specific preview performance or the sixth specific preview performance is executed, it is determined that a reach is established (develops into a reach) after that. That is, the fifth specific preview performance and the sixth specific preview performance are performances that suggest that a reach is established (develops into a reach).

In addition, in the case of SP reach fluctuations (SP jackpot fluctuations, SP loss fluctuations) and L reach fluctuations (L jackpot fluctuations, L loss fluctuations), the "7th special notice performance" may be determined, but N loss In the case of fluctuation, normally A loss fluctuation, the "7th special notice performance" will not be determined. Therefore, when the seventh specific preview performance is executed, it is determined that SP reach and L reach will be executed afterwards (develops into SP reach and L reach). That is, the seventh specific preview performance is a performance that suggests that SP reach or L reach will be executed (develops into SP reach or L reach).

Furthermore, in the case of SP jackpot fluctuations, L jackpot fluctuations, SP loss fluctuations, and L loss fluctuations, the 7th special notice performance may be determined, but compared to the cases of SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, SP loss In the case of fluctuation or L loss fluctuation, the probability of being determined as the 7th special notice performance is extremely low. Therefore, when the seventh specific preview performance is executed, there is a possibility that the game will lose after that, but there is a high possibility that it will be a jackpot. In other words, the seventh specific preview performance is a performance that suggests that although there is a possibility of losing, there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

Furthermore, according to the specific preview performance type determination table shown in FIG. It is suggested that the possibility of a jackpot game state is high in the order of 5 specific preview performance < 6th specific preview performance < 7th specific preview performance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 determines the specific preview performance type, and then sets a command (specific preview performance start command) indicating the specific preview performance type, which is the result of the determination, in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. The specific preview performance start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the specific notice effect start command, the image CPU 141 displays the command on the display unit 50a when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3. First, a color specific preview performance image G30 is displayed to start the specific preview performance.

In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the specific preview performance, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the specific preview performance according to the specific preview performance type that is the result of the specific preview performance type determination. Audio is output from the speaker 52. Furthermore, at a timing immediately after this, the image CPU 141 restarts the action of the character according to the specific preview performance type that is the result of the specific preview performance type determination.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when two characters are involved in a specific preview performance, the names of the two characters are called in quick succession (without a pause) in one specific preview performance audio, and the specific preview performance Although the character in the effect image G30 performed an action corresponding to the character, the effect content is not limited to this and may be changed as appropriate. Here, an example of this modification is shown in FIG. 66 using the fifth specific preview performance as an example.

For example, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since all the characters related to the specific preview effect image G30 stop moving, first, as shown in FIG. A specific preview performance sound representing "character V", one of the characters involved in the preview performance, is output, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 66(B), character V in the stopped specific preview performance image G30 moves. resume. Subsequently, while the action of character V continues, as shown in FIG. Immediately after the sound is output, as shown in FIG. 66(D), the character W in the stopped specific preview effect image G30 resumes its motion.

In this way, when two characters are involved in a specific preview performance, one of the two characters is called first, the stopped character in the specific preview performance image G30 resumes its movement, and then, The other of the two characters may be called, and the stopped character in the specific preview effect image G30 may resume its motion. That is, the motion of the character related to the specific preview performance may be restarted in stages.

Further, a specific preview effect in which a sound related to the name of a predetermined character is outputted from the speaker 52 and the character resumes its action immediately after that may be changed as follows.

For example, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the specific preview performance is started when a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3. When the specific preview performance is started, first, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the specific preview performance image G30 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Different characters are displayed in each of the four areas divided vertically and horizontally into the specific preview effect image G30 displayed on the entire display section 50a. Specifically, the character V is displayed in the upper left of the specific preview performance image G30, the character W is displayed in the upper right of the specific preview performance image G30, the character X is displayed in the lower left of the specific preview performance image G30, and the character Character Y is displayed at the lower right of the preview performance image G30. However, here, each of character V, character W, character X, and character Y is stopped and is not moving. In addition, the specific preview performance image G30 is colored appropriately.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the color specific preview performance image G30 is displayed (at the first timing), as a stop performance, the specific preview performance is The entire image G30 is made monochrome. Subsequently, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the specific preview performance image G30 was made monochrome (at a second timing after the first timing), the performance content of the specific preview performance branches, A pre-announcement performance and a restart performance are executed. Specifically, the name of the character related to the specific preview performance is output from the speaker 52 as the specific preview performance audio, and the character corresponding to the output specific preview performance audio in the specific preview performance image G30 is colored accordingly. and performs the action associated with that character.

Here, the branching pattern (development pattern) after the specific preview performance image G30 is converted into monochrome, in other words, the characters related to the specific preview performance sound and the types of characters that operate after being converted into color are character V, character W. , character X, character Y, character V and character W, character X and character Y, and all characters (character V, character W, character X, and character Y). As in the case of the specific preview performance described above, the type of character and the type of specific preview performance are associated.

In the first specific preview performance related to the character V, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the movements of all the characters related to the specific preview performance image G30 have stopped (the second timing after the first timing) First, as shown in FIG. 68 (A-1), the first specific preview production sound "Character V" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 68 (A-2). As shown in FIG. perform a performance action).

In the second specific preview performance related to the character W, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the specific preview performance image G30 was converted into monochrome (at the second timing after the first timing), first the figure is As shown in FIG. 68 (B-1), the second specific preview production sound "Character W" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 68 (B-2), it is converted into monochrome. The area (upper right) related to the character W in the specific preview performance image G30 is colored, and the colored character W performs an action (second specific preview performance action) associated with the character W.

In the third specific preview performance related to character As shown in FIG. 68 (C-1), the third specific preview production sound "Character X" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. The area (lower left) related to the character X in the specific preview performance image G30 is colored, and the colored character X performs an action (third specific preview performance action) associated with the character X.

In the fourth specific preview performance related to character Y, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the specific preview performance image G30 was made monochrome (at the second timing after the first timing), first the figure is As shown in FIG. 68 (D-1), the fourth specific preview production sound "Character Y" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 68 (D-2), it is converted into monochrome. The area (lower right) related to the character Y in the specific preview performance image G30 is colored, and the colored character Y performs an action associated with the character Y (fourth specific preview performance action). .

Although not shown in the figure, in the fifth specific preview performance related to character V and character W, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the specific preview performance image G30 was made monochrome, (at the first timing) (later at a second timing), first, the fifth specific preview performance "Character V, Character W" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, the character in the monochrome specific preview performance image G30 is output. The areas related to V and character Y (upper left and upper right) are colored, and the colored character V performs the first specific preview performance action, and the colored character W performs the second specific preview performance action. I do.

Although not shown, in the sixth specific preview performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the specific preview performance image G30 was made monochrome (at a second timing after the first timing), As in the case of the fifth specific notice effect, first, the sixth specific notice effect "Character The areas related to character X and character Y (bottom left and bottom right) are colored, and the colored character Perform a preview performance action.

Furthermore, although not shown, in the seventh specific preview performance, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the specific preview performance image G30 was made monochrome (at a second timing after the first timing), First, the seventh specific preview performance "Everyone" is output from the speaker 52, and immediately after that, the monochrome specific preview performance image G30 is entirely colored, and the colored character V is output. A first specific notice performance action, a second specific notice performance action by the colored character W, a third specific notice performance action by the colored character X, and a fourth specific notice performance action by the colored character Y. It is done all at once.

In this way, after the specific preview performance image G30 is converted into monochrome, if it is branched (developed) into a production content involving multiple characters, multiple characters can be displayed in quick succession (without a pause) with one specific preview performance sound. ), the plurality of characters are colored all at once, and perform the action associated with the character. That is, in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 62 to 66, the action that is one element of the specific preview performance is invalidated by stopping the character that was the main character of the performance that had been moving until then. In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 67 to 68, the character that is the main character in the specific preview performance image G30 that was displayed in color is changed to monochrome, thereby invalidating the color that is one of the elements that constitute the specific preview performance. Ru. In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 62 to 66, after the action is disabled, the character is called as a pre-announcement performance, and the action related to that character is restarted as a restart performance, thereby forming a specific notice performance. However, in the specific example shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, after the color is disabled, the character is called as a pre-announcement effect, and the color related to that character is resumed. By restarting the performance, color, which is one element of the specific preview performance, is activated.

In addition, as in the specific preview effect, the image displayed on the display section 50a is made monochrome, then the sound is output from the speaker 52, and the part corresponding to the sound is made into color, as shown below. It may be expanded to For example, when a plurality of colors of the image displayed on the display section 50a are provided, and a preview performance in which the probability of entering a jackpot game state differs depending on the color type is being executed on the plurality of display sections 50a. Then, a sound representing a color is output from the speaker 52, and only the image that changes to the color corresponding to the sound is colored in accordance with the output of the sound.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when two characters are involved in a specific preview performance, the names of the two characters are called in quick succession (without a pause) in one specific preview performance audio, and the specific preview performance Although the characters in the performance image G30 have resumed their movements all at once, the content of the performance is not limited to this and may be changed as appropriate. Here, an example of this modification is shown in FIG. 66 using the fifth specific preview performance as an example.

For example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since all the characters related to the specific preview effect image G30 stopped moving (at the second timing after the first timing), ), the speaker 52 outputs a specific preview effect sound representing "Character V", one of the characters related to the fifth specific preview effect, and accordingly, as shown in FIG. The character V in the effect image G30 resumes its action. Subsequently, while the action of character V continues, as shown in FIG. The sound is output, and in response to the sound, the character W in the specific preview effect image G30 resumes its action, as shown in FIG. 66(D).

In this way, when two characters are involved in a specific preview performance, one of the two characters is called first, that one character in the specific preview performance image G30 resumes the action, and then the two characters are called. The other character may be called, and the other character in the specific preview effect image G30 may resume its action. That is, the motion of the character related to the specific preview performance may be restarted in stages (the advance notice performance and the restart performance may be performed in stages for each performance entity).

In addition, as in the example of changing the specific preview effect, the image displayed on the display section 50a is made monochrome, then the sound is output from the speaker 52, and the part corresponding to the sound is made into color. It may be expanded as follows. For example, a specific image displayed on the display section 50a has a plurality of colors, and the plurality of display sections 50a execute preview effects in which the probability of entering a jackpot game state differs depending on the color type. When the user is in the room, the speaker 52 outputs a sound representing a color, and in accordance with the output of the sound, only the image that changes to the color corresponding to the sound is colored.

Here, there are a dialogue preview and a corresponding icon change notice as preview performances in which the probability of reaching a jackpot game state differs depending on the type of color.

The line preview consists of displaying an image (line preview image) representing that a certain character will say a line. The dialogue preview image includes a portion representing speech balloons. A plurality of colors are set for the balloon portion, and the magnitude relationship of the possibility of a jackpot game state is suggested according to the color type. Green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the speech bubble portion included in the dialogue preview image, and the probability of a jackpot game state is high in the order of green < red < gold.

Further, the icon change notice is an effect in which the icon is displayed in a special mode different from the normal mode. The normal mode and the special mode are configured with the same shape (for example, a circle), but differ in color. The normal mode is white, and special modes include green, red, and gold. Then, in the order of green < red < gold, there is a high possibility that a jackpot game state will occur.

It should be noted that whether or not the line preview can be executed and whether or not the icon change notice can be executed are determined based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, similarly to the specific preview performance. Further, the color of each notice is determined based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, similar to the specific notice performance type.

Then, at a certain timing, while the dialogue preview image and the icon are being displayed, the entire display section 50a is rendered monochrome. Subsequently, a sound representing a color is output from the speaker 52, and only the image that changes to the color corresponding to the sound is colored in accordance with the output of the sound. Here, when the sound "red" is output from the speaker 52, the line preview image changes to red, the icon changes to red, and the line preview image and the icon change to red. There are cases. Similarly, when the speaker 52 outputs the voices "green" and "gold", the process is similarly branched.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY2, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) may be made more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the image display device 50 (predetermined producing means) may be used to produce the effect. It is possible to execute a specific notice performance (suggestive performance) that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state (specific game state) using the image display device 50 (predetermined performance means). Yes, in the specific preview performance (suggestive performance), a plurality of components are included by the image display device 50 (predetermined performance means), each of the plurality of components is activated, and in the specific preview performance (suggestive performance), At the first timing, a stop effect is executed in which all of the multiple characters (multiple components) that had been operating until then stop, and at the second timing after the first timing, the multiple characters (multiple components) ), a pre-announcement effect may be executed to notify in advance what operation will be resumed, and a restart effect may be executed to restart the operation related to the notification target of the pre-announcement effect. Therefore, the action of the character (component) that finally performs the action stands out, so the performance effect of the specific preview performance including the action is improved, and the game's interest is improved.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY2, the frame movable body 56 is provided, and the frame movable body main body 56k (storage body) of the frame movable body 56 is capable of operating and appearing in a visible manner from an invisible standby state. The first movable part 56f1 to the fourth movable part 56f4 (a plurality of movable parts) are housed, and in the specific look-ahead performance using the frame movable body 56, there is a possibility of a jackpot game state depending on the type of the movable part 56f that appears. different. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the actual frame movable body 56 and increase the interest in the game. Further, the frame movable body 56 includes a light emitting portion 56h, and after the light emitting portion 56h emits light, any one of the first movable portion 56f1 to the fourth movable portion 56f4 (a plurality of movable portions) may appear. Therefore, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the frame movable body 56 and prevent interference with performances other than the specific look-ahead performance. Further, when the frame movable body main body 56k (storage body) is touched by a player after the light emitting part 56h emits light, any of the first movable part 56f1 to the fourth movable part 56f4 (a plurality of movable parts) appears. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's degree of experience regarding the appearance of any one of the first to fourth movable parts 56f1 to 56f4 (a plurality of movable parts) in the specific pre-read performance.

Furthermore, as a specific look-ahead effect, a hold icon (container image) representing the frame movable body 56 may be displayed on the display unit 50a, and after displaying the hold icon (container image) representing the frame movable body 56, the light emitting unit Emit 56h. Therefore, the effect image and the light emission effect by the light emitting section 56h of the actual frame movable body 56 are combined, and the effect of the specific look-ahead effect is improved. Further, when any of the first movable part 56f1 to the fourth movable part 56f4 (a plurality of movable parts) appears, the pending icon (container image) representing the frame movable body 56 is changed according to the appearance. The icon changes to a pending icon (movable part image) representing the movable part 56f that has been moved. Therefore, the performance image and the action performance based on the operation of the movable portion 56f of the actual frame movable body 56 are combined, and the performance effect of the specific look-ahead performance is further improved.

(Example of modification of second embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

Pachinko gaming machine PY2 executes a stop effect in which all of the plurality of constituent elements (characters) stop at a first timing (when 1 second has elapsed since the start of the special figure fluctuation display), and At a later second timing (when 2 seconds have elapsed since the stop), a pre-announcement performance (output of a specific preview performance sound) is performed to notify in advance which of the plurality of components will resume operation. , as a performance that resumes the operation related to the notification target of the advance notice performance (resuming the movement of the character related to the specific preview performance sound), the specific preview performance is the special figure variation indicated by the special figure variation start command. Although it is executed in the special figure variation effect based on the pattern, it may be executed as a look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead determination result indicated by the start winning command. Further, the performance may be executed during the jackpot game based on an opening command related to the jackpot game. In this case, the performance is a performance that suggests that a jackpot game with a relatively large number of round games is being executed, or a high probability state or a time saving state according to the end of the jackpot game. It may also be an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as.

In addition, the specific notice performance is executed based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern indicated by the special pattern fluctuation start command based on the winning to the first starting port 11 in the normal performance mode, but in the variable probability performance mode or the time-saving performance mode, It may be made to be executed based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command based on winning to the second starting opening 12.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the specific preview performance suggests the possibility of a jackpot game state; in other words, the specific preview performance functions as a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed. However, certain jackpot games, such as jackpot games that have a relatively large number of rounds played, or jackpot games that shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player such as a high probability state or a time saving state after the jackpot game ends, It may also function as an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that it will be executed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the main character in the specific preview performance is a character representing a person, but the main character is not limited to a character representing a person, and may be changed as appropriate, such as an animal or an item. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the specific preview performance is executed using the image display device 50, but the type of performance device that operates in the specific preview performance may be other than the image display device 50. For example, pachinko gaming machine PY2 is equipped with a plurality of movable bodies that can be operated, and as a special preview effect, once the plurality of movable bodies have operated in a way that is visible to the player, the operation of the plurality of movable bodies has stopped. Then, a pre-notification performance may be performed using the speaker 52 or the like to notify the movable body that will resume operation, and then the movable body targeted for the notification may resume operation. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PY2 is equipped with a plurality of light-emitting bodies that can emit light, and as a special notice effect, the plurality of light-emitting bodies are turned off while the plurality of light-emitting bodies are performing a background light-emitting effect, Then, a pre-notification performance may be performed using the speaker 52 or the like to notify the light emitters that will resume emitting light, and then the light emitters targeted for the notification may resume emitting light.

Further, in the second embodiment, four characters are displayed (appear) in the specific preview performance, but the number of characters is not limited to four, and may be from one to three, or five or more. When the number of characters is one, after any part of the character (for example, hands, feet, head) is announced as a pre-announcement effect, that part may be activated. Alternatively, multiple movement patterns after stopping (e.g., running, jumping, dancing) are set, and after any of the movement patterns (e.g., running, flying, dancing) is announced as a pre-announcement performance, the movement pattern is selected. The following operations may be performed. When a specific notice performance is performed using the speaker 52, for example, while BGM corresponding to the production mode is being output from the speaker 52, the sound is once muted, and multiple songs are played as the advance notice performance. After one of the songs is announced, that song may be output from the speaker 52. When a specific preview effect is executed using a light emitter that can emit light in multiple colors, for example, when a background light effect using various colors of light emitters is being executed, After the light is once turned off and one of a plurality of colors is announced as a preliminary notification effect, the light emitting body may emit light in that color.

Furthermore, the time when the specific notice effect starts (in the second embodiment, when 1 second has passed after the start of the special figure variation effect), the time from when the specific notice effect starts until the stop effect is executed. The time (in the second embodiment, 3 seconds; first timing), in other words, the time that the main body of the performance is performing the action (in the second embodiment, 3 seconds; second timing), the time required for the stop performance, in other words, The time during which the action of the character, which is the main character, is stopped and the time during which the action is resumed are not limited to those in the second embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate.

Further, the specific content of the action of the character who is the main character may be changed as appropriate. In the second embodiment, the action content differs depending on the character, but the action content of all the characters may be the same, or the action content of some characters may be the same. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, for each character, the content of the initial action and the content of the action after restarting are the same, but they may be different.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY2, a plurality of movable parts (first movable part 56f1 to fourth movable part 56f4) that are in a standby state where they cannot be visually recognized can appear in a visible manner, and the types of movable parts that appear can be , a specific pre-reading effect is executed based on the pre-reading judgment result indicated by the start prize winning command, as an effect with a different possibility of becoming a specific gaming state (jackpot gaming state), but the special pre-reading effect indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command is Based on the figure variation pattern, it may be executed as a preview performance in the special figure variation performance according to the special figure variation start command. In this case, an image representing the frame movable body 56 displayed on the display section 50a before the light emitting section 56h emits light, and an image representing the appeared movable section displayed on the display section 50a after the movable section 56f appears. , the icon may be used.

Further, the shape of the frame movable body 56, the installation position of the frame movable body 56, the number of movable parts 56f, the shape of the movable part 56f, and the moving direction of the movable part 56f are not limited to those in the second embodiment, but may be changed as appropriate. good. Furthermore, the images representing the frame movable body 56 and the images representing the appearing movable parts are images that are displayed in response to the occurrence of the right to execute the special figure variable display such as the pending icon or the icon. It is not limited to , and may be changed as appropriate. Therefore, for example, a plurality of movable parts that are in a standby state that cannot be seen can appear in a visible manner, and depending on the type of movable part that appears, a production with a different possibility of entering a specific game state is started. A new image dedicated to the performance may be displayed at the appropriate timing. In addition, multiple movable parts that are in a standby state that cannot be seen can appear in a visible manner, and the possibility of entering a specific gaming state differs depending on the type of moving part that appears. The performance may be performed using a pending icon or a predetermined image that was displayed at the time that is different from the icon.

In addition, multiple movable parts that are in a standby state that cannot be seen can appear in a visible manner, and the possibility of entering a specific game state differs depending on the type of moving part that appears. It may also be executed during a jackpot game based on the opening command. In this case, the performance is a performance that suggests that a jackpot game with a relatively large number of round games is being executed, or a high probability state or a time saving state according to the end of the jackpot game. It may also be an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as.

Furthermore, the specific look-ahead performance is executed based on the look-ahead determination result indicated by the first start prize winning command based on winning in the first start opening 11 in the normal performance mode, but in the variable probability performance mode or the time-saving performance mode, It may be made to be executed based on the pre-read determination result indicated by the second start winning command based on the winning to the second starting opening 12.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the target of the specific look-ahead performance is the possibility of a jackpot game state; in other words, the specific look-ahead performance functions as a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed. However, certain jackpot games, such as jackpot games that have a relatively large number of rounds played, or jackpot games that shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player such as a high probability state or a time saving state after the jackpot game ends, It may also function as an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that it will be executed.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when a specific look-ahead effect is executed, the specific look-ahead effect starts when the hold icon corresponding to the start winning command (occurrence of special figure hold) is displayed. Although an image representing the movable body 56 is displayed, the timing at which the image is displayed is not limited to the second embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when a specific look-ahead effect is executed, the hold icon corresponding to the start winning command (occurrence of special figure hold) is initially displayed in the normal mode, and then when any special figure hold is extinguished ( The normal mode of the pending icon may be changed to the mode representing the frame movable body 56 at a predetermined timing such as when the pending icon is shifted) or during a special figure variation effect.

Further, in the second embodiment, the period in which the light emitting unit 56h emits white light in the specific prefetch effect is limited, but the light emitting unit 56h emits white light while the hold icon related to the specific prefetch effect is displayed. It may be possible to emit light and to extinguish when it comes into contact with the frame movable body main body 56k. That is, the period during which any of the movable parts 56f can be made to appear by contacting the frame movable body 56 in the specific look-ahead performance is the period from when the icon representing the frame movable body 56 appears until the icon disappears. Also good.

Further, in the second embodiment, the light emitting section 56h first emits white light in the specific look-ahead effect, but the light emitting section 56h may not emit light. In this case, the period in which any of the movable parts 56f can appear by contacting the frame movable body 56 in the specific look-ahead effect is the entire period during which the hold icon representing the frame movable body 56 is displayed, or a part of the period. It may also be a specific period of time. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, one of the movable parts 56f appears in response to the player's contact with the frame movable body 56, but a predetermined movable part 56f appears regardless of the player's contact with the frame movable body 56. The movable portion 56f may appear at the appropriate timing.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the third embodiment will mainly be described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY3 according to the third embodiment is composed of a so-called "1 type 2 type mixing machine". In one pachinko game machine PY3, when a special drawing 1 lottery is held and a jackpot is won, mainly triggered by the winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, the first winning opening 14, which will be described later, is opened. There is a specification called "Type 1 (so-called "DigiPachi type")" in which a jackpot game is executed, and a special drawing 2 lottery is held when the game ball enters the second starting hole 12, resulting in a small win. If you win, a small winning game in which the second big prize opening 15 (described later) is opened is executed, and the game ball that won the second big prize opening 15 opened in the small winning game is placed in a specific area 16 (so-called "V zone"), which will be described later. ”) (so-called “V winning”), a jackpot game is executed.

Here, FIG. 69 shows a front view of the game board unit YU of the pachinko game machine PY3. As shown in FIG. 69, the gaming area 6 includes a first grand prize device 14D and a second grand prize device 15D that can be reversibly changed between a state in which game balls cannot win and a state in which they can win. is provided. The first big winning device 14D corresponds to the big winning device 14D of the basic embodiment. Therefore, the first grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a first grand prize opening 14 that can change between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by a first AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the first big prize winning device 14D. Further, the first big winning device 14D is provided with a first big winning hole sensor 14a that detects that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 (winning).

The second big prize winning device 15D is provided directly below the first big winning device 14D on the downstream side. The second grand prize winning device 15D is formed with a second grand prize opening 15 that can change between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. , it takes a closed mode and an open mode by the second AT opening/closing member 15k provided in the second big winning device 15D. Further, the second big winning device 15D is provided with a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15 (winning).

In addition, in the third embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the first big winning hole 14. On the other hand, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the second grand prize opening 15.

Next, the structure of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15 will be explained. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15. As shown in FIG. 70, the configuration after the game ball enters the second big winning hole 15 is that there are a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 through which the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 15 can pass. It is provided. Further, a sorting member 16k is provided which can sort the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 15 into a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17.

The distribution member 16k is configured to be movable forward and backward by a distribution solenoid 16s (see FIG. 71). The distribution solenoid 16s is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and the game control microcomputer 101 can control the distribution solenoid 16s in a small winning game to be described later.

The game control microcomputer 101 moves the distribution member 16k forward and backward using the distribution solenoid 16s, so that the game ball entering the second big prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 in a first passing state; It is possible to set the state to either a second passage state in which the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 can pass through the non-specific area 17. The sorting member 16k is normally held at the advanced position so as to enter the second passing state, and when playing a small winning game, it retreats to the retracted position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and returns to the first passing state. Change. Details of the operation of the distribution member 16k in the small winning game will be described later.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine PY3 is provided with a specific area sensor 16a (see FIG. 71) that detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 16, but does not detect game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 17. The specific area sensor 16a is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and when it detects a game ball, it outputs a signal indicating that it has detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 to the game control board 100.

In addition, a transparent window (not shown) made of synthetic resin is provided in front of the specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17, so that the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 and the non-specific area. The player can visually confirm which of the 17 passes the player has passed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko game machine PY3 will be explained. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko gaming machine PY3. As shown in FIG. 71, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include a first AT solenoid 14s, a second AT solenoid 15s, and a distribution solenoid 16s. The game control board 100 sends signals for controlling the driving of the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s to each of the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s. It is possible to output

The first AT solenoid 14s is connected to the first AT opening/closing member 14k, and when the first AT solenoid 14s is driven, the first AT opening/closing member 14k performs an opening/closing operation. The second AT solenoid 15s is connected to the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and when the second AT solenoid 15s is driven, the second AT opening/closing member 15k performs an opening/closing operation. The distribution solenoid 16s is connected to the distribution member 16k, and the distribution member 16k moves forward and backward with respect to the front surface of the game board 1 when the distribution solenoid 16s is driven.

In addition, as various sensors connected to the game control board 100, the above-mentioned first big winning hole sensor 14a, second big winning hole sensor 15a, and specific area sensor 16a can output signals to the game control board 100. It is connected. When the first big winning hole sensor 14a detects a game ball, it outputs a signal indicating that there has been a winning to the first big winning hole 14 to the game control microcomputer 101. When the second big winning hole sensor 15a detects a game ball, it outputs a signal indicating that there has been a winning to the second big winning hole 15 to the game control microcomputer 101. When the specific area sensor 16a detects a game ball, it outputs a signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning) to the game control microcomputer 101.

Next, the game states that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY3 will be explained. In the pachinko game machine PY3, only one type of normal probability state is set as a gaming state related to the probability of winning a jackpot in jackpot determination. On the other hand, as the gaming states related to the winning ease of the second starting opening 12, a non-time saving state (low base state) and a time saving state (high base state) are set, as in the basic embodiment. Therefore, hereinafter, the low probability low base gaming state will be referred to as the "normal gaming state", and the low probability high base gaming state will simply be referred to as the "time saving state".

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY3 shoots the game ball from the second starting hole 12 in the time-saving state, rather than aiming at the first starting hole 11 and continuing to shoot the game ball with a left hit to win the first starting hole 11 in the normal gaming state. It is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball by hitting to the right while aiming at the second starting hole 12 to win a prize. Furthermore, as will be described later, in the third embodiment, it is set so that it is more advantageous for the player to perform the special pattern 2 lottery than to perform the special pattern 1 lottery. Therefore, basically, the player plays a game in which the player fires the game ball by hitting right so as to win the second starting hole 12 in the time saving state. In addition, in the third embodiment, the pachinko game machine PY3, in the normal gaming state, does not aim at the second starting hole 12 and continue firing the game ball by hitting the right hand to make the second starting hole 12 win. It is configured so that it is easier to aim at the starting hole 11 and continue to shoot the game ball by hitting to the left to win a prize at the first starting hole 11. Therefore, basically, the player plays a game in which the player fires the game ball by hitting to the left so as to win the first starting hole 11 in the normal game state.

In addition, in the third embodiment, like in the basic embodiment, if a prize is won in the first starting slot 11, special drawing 1 reservation may occur, but if a prize is won in the second starting slot 12, , special drawing 2 reservation cannot occur. In other words, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 12 while the special figure variable display is being executed, the jackpot game is being executed, or the small winning game is being executed, the winning It is not possible to reserve the right to execute the second jackpot determination based on , and the special figure 2 variable display. Therefore, the second jackpot determination and the special figure 2 variable display are executed when a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 when none of the special figure variable display, the jackpot game, and the small win game are being executed. Only.

Next, jackpot determination according to the third embodiment will be explained. A configuration example of the jackpot determination table referred to in the jackpot determination according to the third embodiment is shown in FIG. 72(A). As shown in FIG. 72(A), as a jackpot judgment table, a jackpot judgment table (first jackpot judgment table) related to special drawing 1 used in jackpot judgment (first jackpot judgment) based on winning in the first starting opening 11 is used. ) and a jackpot judgment table (second jackpot judgment table) related to the special drawings 2 used in jackpot judgment (second jackpot judgment) based on winnings in the second starting opening 12.

According to the first jackpot determination table, in the first jackpot determination, it is determined that the game is a jackpot or a loss. On the other hand, according to the second jackpot determination table, in the second jackpot determination, a jackpot, a small win, or a loss is determined. As will be described later, when a small hit is determined in the second jackpot determination, a stop display of the special figure 2 is executed in a manner that finally indicates a small hit on the special figure 2 variable display (a predetermined result of "small win" is displayed). is derived), and a small winning game is executed according to the stop display. When the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the big winning game is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72(A), in the first jackpot determination, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is set to 1/319. On the other hand, in the second jackpot determination, the probability of determining a jackpot is set to 1/319, and the probability of determining a small win is set to 4/319 (≈1/80). As in the basic embodiment, in each jackpot judgment table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is shown in FIG. They are distributed appropriately to achieve the selectivity shown. However, the jackpot selection rate and the small win selection rate are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the first jackpot determination, a small win may be included as a jackpot determination result. Alternatively, in the second jackpot determination, the jackpot determination result may not include a jackpot.

Note that when comparing the first jackpot determination and the second jackpot determination, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/319 in both determinations. However, while the first jackpot determination does not result in a small win, the second jackpot determination may result in a small win, and if the small win is won, a jackpot game may be executed. Therefore, it can be said that the special pattern 2 lottery is more advantageous for the player than the special pattern 1 lottery because the player can win a small prize.

Next, a jackpot symbol and a small prize symbol according to the third embodiment will be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of jackpot as well as the jackpot win. The jackpot symbol is determined by jackpot symbol type determination, and the jackpot symbol type determination is performed using a jackpot symbol type determination table. FIG. 72(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72(B), three types of jackpot symbols, jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, are provided as the jackpot symbol of special drawing 1. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special drawing 1, jackpot symbol A is selected with a probability of 10%, jackpot symbol B is selected with a probability of 45%, and jackpot symbol C is selected with a probability of 45%. Moreover, one type of jackpot symbol D is provided as the jackpot symbol of the special drawing 2. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special figure 2, the jackpot symbol D is selected with a probability of 100%.

In addition, the small winning symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of small winning as well as the small winning. In the special symbol variable display when a small hit is won, the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a derivation of the result of the jackpot determination. The small winning symbol is determined by small winning symbol type determination, and the small winning symbol type determination is performed using a small winning symbol type determination table. FIG. 72(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning symbol type determination table according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72(C), four types of small winning symbols are provided as the small winning symbols of special drawing 2: small winning symbol A, small winning symbol B, small winning symbol C, and small winning symbol D. There is. According to the small winning symbol type determination table for special drawing 2, small winning symbol A is selected with a 25% probability, small winning symbol B is selected with a 25% probability, and small winning symbol C is selected with a 25% probability. The small winning symbol D is selected with a probability of 25%.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the special symbol 2 related determination information includes, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol random number, jackpot symbol type random number, reach random number, and special symbol fluctuation pattern random number, a small number for determining the small winning symbol type. It also includes the winning symbol type random number. Therefore, a small winning symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS) related to the small winning symbol type random number is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. The small hit symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS), like the special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T) and the jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), uses the main random numbers for normal symbols and special symbols. It is updated in the update process (S003). Then, in step S211, the game control microcomputer 101 also acquires the small winning symbol type random number as the special figure 2 related determination information and stores it in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104. Note that the range of the small winning symbol type random number can be set as appropriate, but in the third embodiment, it is set to "0 to 255".

In addition, in the small winning symbol type determination table, the small winning symbol type random number determination value (small winning symbol type random number determination value) is shown in FIG. 72(C) for the small winning symbol type that is the result of the small winning symbol type determination. They are distributed appropriately to achieve the selectivity shown. Therefore, as will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine PY3 compares the obtained small winning symbol type random number with the small winning symbol type determination table to determine the type of the small winning symbol.

In addition, the number of jackpot symbol types, the number of small win symbol types, the selection rate of each jackpot symbol type, and the selection rate of each small win symbol type related to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are the same as those of the third embodiment. The value is not limited to , and may be set as appropriate.

Next, a jackpot game according to the third embodiment will be explained. In the third embodiment, the jackpot game includes a game ball that enters the second jackpot opening 15 that is opened in the case where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small win game that is executed after the small jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. is executed when passes through the specific area 16 (V winning). The jackpot game components constituting the jackpot game, in other words, the jackpot game control table for controlling the jackpot game, determine the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, in detail, the jackpot symbol that is the trigger for executing the jackpot game. It is associated with the type and the type of small winning symbol. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot game control table according to the third embodiment.

Incidentally, even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 thereafter, the jackpot game will not be executed. Therefore, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the direct trigger for executing the jackpot game is when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), but the game ball does not enter the second big winning opening 15. The game ball cannot pass through the specific area 16 (V winning), and the ball entering the second grand prize opening 15 can be realized by opening the second grand prize opening 15. Since the opening of is executed in a small winning game, the stop display of the small winning symbol is also included in the trigger for executing the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the following, the stop display of the small winning symbol is referred to as "hitting a small hit/becoming a small hit", and the stopping display of a jackpot symbol and the game ball passing through the specific area 16 are referred to as "hitting a jackpot". It is sometimes called "It's going to be a big hit."

As shown in FIG. 73, the number of times the round game related to the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game") was executed is four times, and the round game associated with jackpot symbol B is executed four times. The number of times the round game related to the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game") and the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game") is executed is eight times. , the number of times the round game related to the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game") associated with the jackpot symbol D is executed is 10 times.

In addition, the jackpot game associated with the small winning symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as the "fifth jackpot game"), the jackpot game associated with the small winning symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as the "sixth jackpot game"), Regarding the jackpot game associated with the small winning symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as the "7th jackpot game") and the jackpot game associated with the small winning symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as the "8th jackpot game") The number of times the round game is executed is 10 times.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the jackpot game component also includes the type of jackpot opening to be opened. As shown in FIG. 73, the first jackpot 14 is set to open in all round games of all jackpot games, regardless of the special symbol type. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, regardless of the special symbol type, for all round games of all jackpot games, the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 in the round game is set to one, and for each opening. The relevant time (opening time) is set to 29.5 seconds, and the time required for closing after opening (closing time) is set to 2.0 seconds. Note that the closing time is not set for the last round game in each jackpot game. This is because after the opening of the first grand prize opening 14 related to the last round game ends, an ending is performed in which the first grand prize opening 14 is kept closed.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the opening time ("OP time" in FIG. 73) of all jackpot games is set to 10.0 seconds regardless of the special symbol type, and the ending time ("OP time" in FIG. 73) of all jackpot games is set to 10.0 seconds. The "ED time") is set to 10.0 seconds.

Note that the specific values related to the jackpot game components are not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the opening time and ending time may be set to different values depending on the gaming state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the types of the big winning holes 14 and 15 to be opened may be different depending on the order of the round games. Furthermore, depending on the order of the round games, the number of times the big winning holes 14, 15 are opened, the total time that the big winning holes 14, 15 are open in the round game, and the closing of the big winning holes 14, 15 after opening. The relevant time (closing time) may be different. Furthermore, the number of times the round game is executed in the jackpot game and the total time during which the jackpot openings 14 and 15 can be opened may vary depending on the type of the small winning symbol.

In addition, for all round games of all jackpot games, the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 in the round game is set to 1, and the time for each opening (opening time) is set to 29.5 seconds. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game depends on the number of times the round game is executed. Considering the type of jackpot trigger special drawing, the jackpot game related to special pattern 2 (fourth jackpot game) is more important than the jackpot game related to special pattern 1 (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game). , 5th jackpot game, 6th jackpot game, 7th jackpot game, 8th jackpot game), the number of rounds of games executed is greater. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, it can be said that the special pattern 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the special pattern 1 lottery.

Next, a small winning game according to the third embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY3 controls opening and closing of the big prize openings 14 and 15 in the small winning game using the small winning game control table. In the third embodiment, the small winning game control table is configured based on the gaming state (playing state at the time of small winning) when the small winning symbol that is the trigger for the small winning game is displayed, and the type of the small winning symbol. It is possible to set them in association. Note that the small winning game control table may be set in association only with the small winning game state or the type of small winning symbol.

The small winning game control table stores elements constituting a small winning game (small winning game constituent elements) particularly regarding opening and closing of the large winning openings 14 and 15. The small winning game components include the type of big winning opening to be opened, the number of openings of the big winning opening in the relevant small winning game, the opening time for each opening (opening pattern), and the time to be closed until the next opening (closing time). , opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time). That is, the small winning game component is associated with the small winning game state and the small winning symbol type. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning game control table according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 74, the small win game control table is associated with the small win game state. In other words, there is a small winning game control table (normal small winning game control table) used when small winning symbols are confirmed and displayed in the normal gaming state, and a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving state. There is a small winning game control table used for (time saving small winning game control table).

Furthermore, for both the normal small winning game control table and the time saving small winning game control table, there is a small winning game control table that is associated with the small winning symbol type. In other words, the regular small winning game control table includes one that is associated with the small winning symbol A (the regular small winning symbol A small winning game control table) and one that is associated with the small winning symbol B (the regular small winning symbol). (small win game control table for small win symbol B), one that is associated with small win symbol C (small win game control table for normal small win symbol C), and one that is associated with small win symbol D (usually small win symbol). There is a small winning game control table for winning symbols D. In addition, the time-saving small winning game control table includes one that is associated with the small winning pattern A (small winning pattern control table for time saving small winning pattern A) and one that is associated with the small winning pattern B (time saving small winning pattern). (Small winning game control table for winning pattern B), one that is associated with small winning pattern C (small winning game control table for small winning pattern C), and one that is associated with small winning pattern D (small winning pattern C). There is a small winning game control table for winning symbols D.

In addition, below, the small winning game controlled and executed using the small winning game control table for the normal small winning symbol A will be referred to as the "normal first small winning game". Similarly, the small winning game that is controlled and executed using the small winning game control table for the normal small winning pattern B is called the "normal second small winning game", and the small winning game control table for the normal small winning pattern C. The small winning game that is controlled and executed using the ``normally third small winning game'', and the small winning game that is normally controlled and executed using the small winning pattern D small winning game control table. This is called the "usually 4th small winning game". In addition, the small winning game that is controlled and executed using the small winning game control table for the time saving small winning symbol A is called the "time saving first small winning game", and the small winning game control table for the time saving small winning symbol B is called the "time saving first small winning game". The small winning game that is controlled and executed using the small winning pattern C is called the "time saving second small winning game", and the small winning game that is controlled and executed using the small winning pattern C table is called " The small winning game that is controlled and executed using the small winning game control table for time saving small winning symbol D is called the ``time saving 4th small winning game''. Furthermore, small winning games related to small winning symbols A are collectively referred to as "first small winning games", small winning games related to small winning symbols B are collectively referred to as "second small winning games", and small winning games are collectively referred to as "second small winning games". The small winning games related to the symbol C are collectively referred to as "third small winning games", and the small winning games related to the small winning symbol D are collectively referred to as "fourth small winning games".

As shown in FIG. 74, the second big prize opening 15 is opened once in all small winning games. The opening time of the second large prize opening 15 in each small winning game is 1.8 seconds. In addition, the opening time of all small winning games in which the gaming state at the time of small winning is the normal gaming state is 10.0 seconds, and the ending time is 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of all small winning games in which the small winning game state is the time saving state is 2.0 seconds, and the ending time is 2.0 seconds. In this way, when the small winning game state is the normal gaming state, a small winning game consisting of the same small winning game component is executed regardless of the small winning symbol type. Similarly, when the small winning game state is the time saving state, a small winning game consisting of the same small winning game components is executed regardless of the small winning symbol type. Below, all the small winning games whose gaming state is the normal gaming state at the time of the small winning are collectively referred to as "normal small winning games", and all the small winning games whose gaming state at the time of the small winning is the time saving state are collectively referred to as "time saving small winning". collectively referred to as "games".

Here, details of the small winning game will be explained using FIG. 75. FIG. 75(A) is a time chart showing the flow of the normal small winning game, and FIG. 75(B) is a time chart showing the flow of the time saving small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 75(A), when the "small winning symbols (small winning symbols A to small winning symbols D)" are stopped and displayed as the stop display of the special figure 2 in the normal game state, the normal small winning game is played. Then, in response to the start of the normal small winning game, an opening (normal small winning OP) in which the second large prize opening 15 is kept closed is performed. The normal small winning OP continues until 10.0 seconds have passed after the start of the normal small winning game, and when the normal small winning OP ends, the second large winning opening 15 opens (the normal small winning opening is performed). At the same time, the distribution member 16k is retracted and enters the first passing state. Normally, the small win release continues until 1.8 seconds have passed after the start of the release or until 10 game balls enter the second grand prize opening 15, while the retraction of the distribution member 16k This continues until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the evacuation. Then, when the normal small winning opening ends, an ending (normal small winning ED) in which the second large prize opening 15 is closed and the closed state is maintained is performed. The normal small win ED continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the ED, and the normal small win game ends when the normal small win ED ends.

As shown in FIG. 75(B), when the "small winning symbols (small winning symbols A to small winning symbols D)" are stopped and displayed as the stop display of the special figure 2 in the time saving state, the time saving small winning game is performed. Then, in response to the start of the time-saving small winning game, an opening (time-saving small winning OP) is performed in which the second large prize opening 15 is initially kept in a closed state. The time-saving small win OP continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the time-saving small win game, and when the time-saving small win OP ends, the second big prize opening 15 is opened (the time-saving small win is released). At the same time, the distribution member 16k is retracted and enters the first passing state. The time-saving small win release continues until 1.8 seconds have passed after the start of the release or until 10 game balls enter the second big prize opening 15, while the retraction of the distribution member 16k This continues until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the evacuation. Then, when the time-saving small win opening is completed, an ending (time-saving small win ED) is performed in which the second big prize opening 15 is closed and the closed state is maintained. The time-saving small win ED continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the ED, and the time-saving small win game ends when the time-saving small win ED ends.

In addition, the game ball that enters the second large prize opening 15 during the normal small winning game and the time saving small winning game is in the non-specific area 17 because the distribution member 16k is in the retracted position in the first passing state. On the other hand, in the second passing state, since the distribution member 16k is in the advanced position, the liquid flows down over the distribution member 16k and passes through the non-specific area 17. Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a jackpot game corresponding to the small winning symbol type is performed in accordance with the end of the small winning game.

As described above, the jackpot game components of the jackpot games associated with the small winning symbol types are the same. Therefore, when a jackpot game associated with a small winning symbol type is started, an opening in which the first jackpot 14 is kept closed is performed for 10.0 seconds, and until the end of the opening, In response, the first round game is started and the first big prize opening 14 is opened. In addition, when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15 (wins) during a small winning game, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls regardless of whether the game ball passes through the specific area 16 or not. It will be done.

Next, the game state to which the pachinko game machine PY3 newly transitions upon the end of the jackpot game, and the termination conditions related to each game state will be explained. In the third embodiment, the game state that is newly transitioned to when the jackpot game ends, and the ending conditions for each game state are associated with the special symbols caused by the jackpot game. Furthermore, the game state to be newly transitioned to upon the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol, and the ending conditions for each gaming state, are the gaming state when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to be displayed. are also associated. In addition, the game state to be newly transitioned to with the end of the jackpot game executed when the game ball that won the second big prize opening 15 in the small winning game passes the specific area 16 (V winning), and each game The end condition related to the state is also associated with the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning). That is, the gaming state to which the jackpot game is ended and the ending conditions related to each gaming state are also associated with the gaming state when the jackpot is won.

Figure 76 (A) shows the type of special symbol (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game when a jackpot is hit in the normal gaming state, and the transition that occurs when the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type ends. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a gaming state setting table showing the relationship between the gaming state and the termination condition related to the gaming state, and FIG. The configuration of a gaming state setting table that represents the relationship between the type of special symbol (special symbol type), the gaming state that changes with the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type, and the ending condition related to the gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example.

As shown in FIG. 76(A), when a jackpot occurs in the normal gaming state, the special symbols that trigger the occurrence of the jackpot game are jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol D, small win symbol A, and small win symbol B. , and small winning symbol C, the jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game, sixth jackpot game, seventh jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol. Upon completion, the game shifts to a time saving state (low probability, high base gaming state). A termination condition is set for this time saving state. The end condition for jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol D is that the special pattern 2 variable display is executed 900 times, and the termination conditions for jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol D are In this case, the special figure 2 variable display is executed once. Therefore, in the time-saving state that transitions to the end of the jackpot game that is executed after the jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol D are stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the special symbol is displayed without the jackpot game being executed. 2 variable display can continue until it is executed 900 times. On the other hand, in the time-saving state that shifts to the end of the jackpot game that is executed after the small winning symbol A, small winning symbol B, and small winning symbol C are stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state, the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to continue until the special figure 2 variable display is executed once. That is, the prescribed number of times of the time-saving state (time-saving prescribed number of times) to which the game is transferred upon the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol D in the normal gaming state is 900 times. Yes, the prescribed number of times in the time-saving state (time-saving prescribed number of times) that is transferred with the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the small winning symbol A, the small winning symbol B, and the small winning symbol C in the normal gaming state is: It is once.

In addition, if the special symbols that trigger the occurrence of the jackpot game in the case of a jackpot in the normal gaming state are the jackpot symbol C and the small win symbol D, the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol (third jackpot game, eighth jackpot game) Upon completion of the jackpot game), a transition is made to the normal game state (low probability low base game state). No end conditions are set for this normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 76(B), the special symbols that trigger the occurrence of the jackpot game in the time-saving state jackpot are jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol D, small win symbol A, and small win symbol B. In some cases, with the end of the jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game, sixth jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol, the time saving state (low probability high base) (gaming state). A termination condition is set for this time saving state. The ending condition for the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol D, the small prize symbol A, and the small prize symbol B is configured such that the special symbol 2 variable display is executed 900 times. Therefore, in the time saving state, the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol D are stopped and displayed, and then the time saving state shifts with the end of the jackpot game that is executed, and in the time saving state, the small winning symbol A, and the small winning symbol. The time-saving state that shifts to the end of the jackpot game executed after the symbol B is stopped and displayed can continue until the special figure 2 variable display is executed 900 times without the jackpot game being executed.

In addition, if the special symbols that trigger the occurrence of the jackpot game in the time saving state are jackpot symbol C, small win symbol C, and small win symbol D, the jackpot game (second Upon completion of the 3rd jackpot game, 7th jackpot game, and 8th jackpot game), a transition is made to the normal gaming state (low probability, low base gaming state). No end conditions are set for this normal gaming state.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY3, the time saving state may occur due to an occurrence trigger different from a jackpot. The occurrence triggers other than the jackpot are that the special symbol variable display is executed a specific number of times without a jackpot in the normal gaming state, and that the losing symbol related to the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state. The trigger for the occurrence of the former time-saving state is referred to as "reaching the ceiling," and the trigger for the occurrence of the latter time-saving state is referred to as a "sudden event." In addition, the time-saving state that occurs due to a jackpot is called "jackpot time-saving", the time-saving state that occurs due to reaching the ceiling is called "ceiling time-saving", and the time-saving state that occurs due to an unexpected event is called "loss time saving". to be called. Further, the specific number of times that the special figure variable display related to ceiling time saving is executed is sometimes referred to as "ceiling", and in the third embodiment, the specific number of times related to ceiling time saving is set to 800 times.

Moreover, the end condition for ceiling time reduction is that the special map 2 variable display is executed 900 times without hitting the jackpot. That is, the ceiling time reduction can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display is executed 900 times without hitting the jackpot, and the specified number of time reductions related to the ceiling time reduction is 900 times. On the other hand, the end condition for shortening the losing time is that the special figure 2 variable display is executed once without hitting the jackpot. That is, the losing time saving can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display is executed once without hitting the jackpot, and the prescribed number of time saving related to the losing time saving is 1 time.

In this way, the prescribed number of times in the time saving state, including the jackpot time saving, is 99 times and 1 time. In the following, a time saving state in which the specified number of time reductions is 99 times may be referred to as an "advantageous time saving state", and a time saving state in which the prescribed number of time saving times is 1 may be referred to as a "disadvantageous time saving state".

Next, in the pachinko game machine PY3, a game flow that can be changed via reaching the ceiling will be explained. FIG. 77 is a diagram schematically showing a game flow that can be changed via reaching the ceiling in the pachinko gaming machine PY3. Although the details will be described later, in the third embodiment, after transitioning to the time saving state, the specified time saving number (1 time or 900 times) of the specified time saving state (time saving final special drawing 2) When the variation) ends, in other words, before the confirmation display of the special figure 2 related to the time-saving final special figure 2 variation is performed, the time-saving state shifts to the normal gaming state.

Further, when a small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed in the special figure 2 variable display, the small winning game is started in the game state at that time. Therefore, when a small winning game is started in the normal gaming state, the first passage of the game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning) related to the small winning game is performed in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the small winning game is started in the time saving state, the passage of the first game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning) related to the small winning game is performed in the time saving state. In addition, when the small winning game is started in the time saving state, the time saving state changes to the normal game state in accordance with the passing of the first game ball related to the small winning game through the specific area 16 (V winning).

In addition, the fact that the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, and that the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed and the first jackpot game is executed may be referred to as "jackpot 1." Similarly, jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, and jackpot symbol D are stopped and displayed, and jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, and jackpot symbol D are stopped and displayed for the second jackpot game, the third jackpot game, and the fourth jackpot. The execution of the game may also be referred to as "jackpot 2," "jackpot 3," or "jackpot 4." Furthermore, the game ball that won the second big prize opening 15 in the first small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol A passes through the specific area 16, and that the fifth big winning game is executed after the passage. is sometimes referred to as "Jackpot 5". Similarly, in the second small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol B, the game ball that won the second big winning opening 15 passes through the specific area 16, and after the passing, the sixth jackpot game is executed. This is called "Jackpot 6", and the game ball that entered the second big prize opening 15 in the third small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol C passes through the specific area 16, and after the passing, the seventh The execution of the jackpot game is referred to as "Jackpot 7", and the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 15 passes through the specific area 16 in the fourth small winning game based on the stop display of the small winning symbol D; The fact that the eighth jackpot game is executed after the passage is also referred to as "jackpot 8."

When the gaming RAM 104 is cleared when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY3, the normal gaming state (low probability low base gaming state) is set as the gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the production mode. A normal production mode that suggests this is set. In the pachinko game machine PY3, the game progresses in this normal game state, and the situation in which the performance in the normal performance mode is executed in the normal game state becomes the starting point of the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY3.

As mentioned above, in the normal game state and normal performance mode, the game ball is fired by hitting the left hand to make it enter the first starting hole 11, and the special drawing 1 lottery (special drawing 1 variable display) is performed based on the winning. The main focus is on games. When the special figure variable display is executed a specific number of times (800 times) without hitting a jackpot in the normal game state and the normal production mode, the time saving state (advantageous time saving state) is entered by reaching the ceiling. Therefore, after the normal gaming state is set when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY3, or after the normal gaming state is newly entered, the special figure variable display can be displayed a certain number of times (800 times) without hitting the jackpot. ) When executed, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the time saving state (advantageous time saving state) where the prescribed number of time saving times is 900 times.

Here, in the pachinko game machine PY3, it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 12 by firing the game ball by hitting the right hand, and in the normal gaming state, by continuing to fire the game ball by hitting the left hand, the game ball is fired from the first starting slot. It is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball by hitting right in a time-saving state and win a prize in the second starting hole 12 than to win a prize in the opening 11, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting hole 12 than to win a special figure 1 lottery. Since this is more likely to result in an advantageous result for the player, in the time-saving state, the game ball is fired by hitting the right hand to enter the second starting hole 12, and the special drawing 2 lottery (special drawing 2) based on the winning is made. Games that involve variable display are mainly played.

In addition, the probability that it will be determined as a "small hit" in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 2 lottery in the time saving state is 4/319 (≒ 1/80), and the probability that it will be determined as a "big hit" is 1/319 Therefore, in an advantageous time saving state, the possibility of winning a small win is four times higher than the possibility of winning a jackpot. Therefore, in the advantageous time saving state, basically, a game is mainly played in which a prize is entered into the second start opening 12, a special drawing 2 lottery is performed based on the winning, and a small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery.

If you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery during a period other than the time-saving final variation (advantageous time-saving final variation) in an advantageous time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state main period), you will receive a small winning symbol (small win) on the special drawing 2 variable display. The symbols A to small winning symbols D) are stopped and displayed, but no matter which type of small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a time-saving small winning game consisting of the same small winning game components is executed.

In the time-saving small winning game, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a jackpot game consisting of the same jackpot game components is executed regardless of the small winning symbol type (jackpot 5 to jackpot 8). However, the game state that changes after the jackpot game differs depending on the small winning symbol type. Here, since the passing of the game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning), which is the trigger for the occurrence of the jackpot game, is performed in a short time, the small winning symbol related to the jackpot game is the small winning symbol A or the small winning symbol. In the case of symbol B, when the corresponding jackpot game (jackpot 5, jackpot 6) ends, the time saving prescribed number of times becomes 900 times (advantageous gaming state), while the small winning symbol related to the jackpot game is small. If it is the winning symbol C or the small winning symbol D (in the case of jackpot 7, jackpot 8), the normal game state is entered in accordance with the end of the jackpot game (jackpot 7, jackpot 8).

In addition, if the specified number of time reductions becomes 900 times in a time saving state (advantageous gaming state) in response to the end of the jackpot game (Jackpot 5, Jackpot 6), the time saving state returns to the same advantageous time saving state as the ceiling time saving although the trigger is different. It turns out that.

In the small winning symbol type determination, the probability that small winning symbol A is determined is 25%, the probability that small winning symbol B is determined is 25%, and the probability that small winning symbol C is determined is 25%. Yes, the probability that the small winning symbol D will be determined is 25%. Therefore, if you win a small win during the main period of the advantageous time-saving state, the probability that the time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) will continue, or that you will continuously shift to the advantageous time-saving state again, is 50%, albeit through a jackpot game. It turns out.

When the advantageous time-saving state continues with the jackpot game in between, the game proceeds in the same way as when the time-saving state shifts to the advantageous time-saving state again due to ceiling time reduction. In other words, the right-handed game continues. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, in the third embodiment, it is not possible to reserve the right to execute the second jackpot determination and the special figure 2 variable display (the special figure 2 reservation cannot occur), so the left button remains as it is. This will lead to a transition to a game related to hitting.

In addition, in the advantageous gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display is executed 899 times (the specified number of time-savings related to the advantageous time-saving state - 1 time) without hitting the jackpot, and the 900th time (the specified number of time-savings related to the advantageous time-saving state) is executed. It is assumed that the special figure 2 variable display (advantageous time saving final variation) has started. As mentioned above, when the time saving final special figure 2 variation ends, the time saving state changes to the normal gaming state. Therefore, the final display of the special symbol related to the advantageous time saving final variation is performed in the normal gaming state.

Here, if the small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed due to the advantageous time saving final variation, the normal small winning game is executed, and when the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 in the normal small winning game passes through the specific area 16. Regardless of the type of small winning symbol, a jackpot game consisting of the same jackpot game components is executed (Jackpot 5 to Jackpot 8). However, the game state to which the game changes after the jackpot game differs depending on the type of small winning symbol. Here, since the passing of the game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning), which is the trigger for the occurrence of the jackpot game, is performed in the normal gaming state, the small winning symbol related to the jackpot game is the small winning symbol A, the small winning In the case of symbol B and small winning symbol C, depending on the end of the jackpot game (Jackpot 5 to Jackpot 7), the specified number of time saving times becomes 1 time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state), while the corresponding jackpot game When the small winning symbol related to is the small winning symbol D, the normal game state is entered in response to the end of the jackpot game (jackpot 8).

In the small winning symbol type determination, the probability of determining the small winning symbol A is 25%, the probability of determining the small winning symbol B is 25%, and the probability of determining the small winning symbol C is 25%. Yes, the probability that the small winning symbol D will be determined is 25%. Therefore, in the case of a small win due to the advantageous time saving final variation, the probability that the time saving state will continue is 75%, although it is through the jackpot game and the time saving state is disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to continue the time saving state with a higher probability than when a small win occurs during the main period of the advantageous time saving state.

In addition, if a losing symbol is confirmed and displayed due to the final change in advantageous time saving, an unexpected situation will occur, so no small hit game or jackpot game will be played, and the specified number of time saving times will be 1 time saving state (unfavorable time saving state). Become.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol D is confirmed and displayed in the final fluctuation of advantageous time saving, the fourth jackpot game is executed (Jackpot 4), and according to the end of the jackpot game, the prescribed number of time saving is 900 times (advantageous time saving state). )become. Therefore, for example, if you reach the ceiling and are able to shift to an advantageous gaming state, but are unable to hit the jackpot and reach the final change in advantageous time reduction, when the small winning symbol D is stopped and displayed. Only then does the game enter a normal gaming state and transition to a situation where a left-handed game is played.

In addition, if an unfavorable time reduction state (jackpot time reduction, loss time reduction) occurs after the final advantageous time reduction change is carried out, the prescribed number of time reduction is one time, but the time reduction state does not change, so the disadvantageous time reduction state Basically, a game in which a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 is played by hitting right. In the third embodiment, it is not possible to reserve the right to execute the second jackpot determination based on winning at the second starting port 12 and the special drawing 2 variable display, so the second starting port 12 is As soon as you win a prize, the special map 2 variable display starts. However, since the prescribed number of times of time saving related to the time saving state is one, the first special figure 2 variation display in the time saving state corresponds to the time saving final special figure 2 variation. Therefore, when the first special figure 2 variable display ends, the disadvantageous time saving state returns to the normal gaming state. That is, the final display of the special symbol related to one special symbol 2 variable display in the disadvantageous time saving state is performed in the normal gaming state.

If a losing symbol is confirmed and displayed in one special figure 2 variable display related to the disadvantageous time-saving state, the confirmed display of the losing symbol will be performed in the normal gaming state, so a small winning game or a jackpot game will be played. Without any problem, the specified number of times of time saving becomes one time saving state (missing time saving or disadvantageous time saving state). Therefore, once the disadvantageous time saving condition is reached, unless the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, "(launch the game ball by hitting the right → winning the prize in the second starting hole 12 →)" Start of the special symbol 2 variable display → End of special figure 2 variable display → Transition to normal game state → Confirmation display of losing symbols related to special figure 2 → Transition to disadvantageous time-saving state A unit game is repeatedly performed with a series of events as one set. It turns out. That is, after one special figure 2 variable display related to the disadvantageous time-saving state is started, the normal game state is momentarily entered, but before the final display of the special figure 2 concerned is performed, the game returns to the disadvantageous time-saving state. As a result, if the second jackpot determination continues to be a loss, the disadvantageous time-saving state will essentially continue.

In addition, if a small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed in one special figure 2 variable display related to the disadvantageous time saving state, the confirmed display of the small winning symbol is performed in the normal gaming state, so it is not a normal small winning game. is executed, and when the game ball that enters the second big winning opening 15 in the normal small winning game passes through the specific area 16, a jackpot game consisting of the same jackpot game components is executed regardless of the small winning symbol type. (Jackpot 5 to Jackpot 8). However, the game state that changes after the jackpot game differs depending on the small winning symbol type. Here, since the passing of the game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning), which is the trigger for the occurrence of the jackpot game, is performed in the normal gaming state, the small winning symbol related to the jackpot game is the small winning symbol A, the small winning In the case of symbol B and small winning symbol C, depending on the end of the jackpot game (Jackpot 5 to Jackpot 7), the specified number of time saving times becomes 1 time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state), while the corresponding jackpot game When the small winning symbol related to is the small winning symbol D, the normal game state is entered in response to the end of the jackpot game (jackpot 8).

In the small winning symbol type determination, the probability that small winning symbol A is determined is 25%, the probability that small winning symbol B is determined is 25%, and the probability that small winning symbol C is determined is 25%. Yes, the probability that the small winning symbol D will be determined is 25%. Therefore, after the final fluctuation of advantageous time saving, in other words, after exiting the advantageous time saving state without hitting the jackpot, if you win a small win while the disadvantageous time saving state continues, it is not through the jackpot game, Although the user is in an unfavorable time-saving state, the probability of shifting to the time-saving state again (probability of being able to return to the time-saving state) is 75%. Therefore, it is possible to continue the time-saving state with a higher probability than when a small win occurs during the main period of the advantageous time-saving state.

In addition, since the prescribed number of time reductions related to the time reduction state that changes in response to the end of the jackpot game based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning) in the normal gaming state is one, the disadvantageous time reduction after the jackpot game Once this state is reached, the game proceeds in the same way as after the stop display of losing symbols related to special drawing 2 due to the advantageous time-saving final variation. Specifically, unless the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, "(launch the game ball with a right hit → win a prize in the second starting hole 12 →) start of special figure 2 variable display → special figure 2 variable display The unit game consisting of the end of → transition to normal game state → stop display of losing symbols related to special drawing 2 → transition to disadvantageous time saving state will be repeated.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the small winning pattern D is stopped and displayed while the special pattern 2 variable display in the disadvantageous time-saving state based on the confirmed display of the losing pattern related to the special pattern 2 is repeatedly performed, the second Since the jackpot determination and the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display cannot be withheld (special figure 2 reservation cannot occur), the end of the 8th jackpot game will be triggered by the confirmed display of the small winning symbol D. At the same time, the game shifts directly to a game involving left-handed hitting. In addition, if the jackpot symbol D is stopped and displayed while the special symbol 2 variable display in the disadvantageous time-saving state based on the fixed display of the losing symbol related to the special symbol 2 is being repeatedly performed, depending on the end of the fourth jackpot game, As a result, a time saving state (advantageous time saving state) is reached in which the prescribed number of time saving times is 900 times.

In this way, after the special figure 2 variable display is executed for the prescribed number of times in the time saving state related to reaching the ceiling, the time saving state continues unless the small winning symbol D is confirmed and displayed. Strictly speaking, the time saving state in which the prescribed number of time saving times is one occurs continuously. Further, when the small winning symbol D is stopped and displayed while this time saving state continues, the time saving state ends and a normal game state is entered.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination and special figure variation pattern according to the third embodiment will be explained. The special figure variation pattern determination is performed based on the special figure variation pattern determination table. The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table) is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state and a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state. It is divided into a fluctuation pattern determination table.

In the following, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state is referred to as the "normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table," and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state is referred to as the "time-saving It is called "Special Figure Fluctuation Pattern Judgment Table". In addition, among the regular special figure variation pattern determination tables, those related to special figure 1 are referred to as "normal special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables," and those related to special figure 2 are referred to as "regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables." to be called. Similarly, among the time-saving special figure variation pattern determination tables, the one related to special figure 1 is referred to as the "time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table", and the one related to special figure 2 is referred to as the "time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table". It is called.

Furthermore, the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is divided into one used at the time of the ceiling time-saving final variation and one used at other times. Although we will not explain the details of the performance, in the ceiling time saving final variation, there is a possibility that the advantageous time saving state will end with the special figure 2 variable display, so as a break, the advantageous time saving state will end. This is to secure performance time for reliably executing the corresponding performance. Below, the time-saving special 2 variation pattern judgment table related to the ceiling time reduction final variation is referred to as the "special time-saving special 2 variation pattern judgment table", and the time-saving special 2 variation pattern judgment table used in cases other than the ceiling time reduction final variation. is referred to as the "Standard Time Saving Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Judgment Table".

FIG. 78(A) is a configuration example of the standard time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 78(B) is a configuration example of the special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Note that the normal special figure 1 variation pattern determination table has the same configuration as the non-time-saving state part of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in the basic embodiment shown in FIG. Therefore, illustration and explanation of the normal special figure 1 variation pattern determination table will be omitted. Further, illustrations and explanations of the regular special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table are also omitted.

As shown in FIG. 78(A), the standard time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table further includes the standard time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the jackpot determination result "Jackpot" and the jackpot determination result "Jackpot". The standard time-saving special 2 variation pattern judgment table associated with "Small hit", the standard time-saving special 2 variation pattern judgment table associated with the jackpot judgment result "Lose" and the reach judgment result "Reach", and the jackpot There is a standard time-saving special map 2 variation pattern determination table that is associated with the determination result "lose" and the reach determination result "no reach".

The standard time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table relating to jackpots and the standard time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table relating to small hits are configured such that one type of special figure 2 variation pattern can be selected. In the standard time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to jackpots, it is possible to select a special figure variation pattern (story jackpot variation) that corresponds to a special figure variation effect in which a story reach is executed through the establishment of a reach after a normal variation. be. In the standard time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to small hits, it is possible to select the special figure variation pattern (story small hit variation) corresponding to the special figure variation production in which the story is executed through the establishment of reach after the normal variation. It is.

In addition, in the standard time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table regarding loss and reach, the special figure variation pattern (story loss variation) corresponding to the special figure variation performance in which the story is executed through the establishment of reach after the normal variation , or after a normal fluctuation, a reach promotion effect is executed using the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 to incite whether or not a reach is established, but the reach is not established and the result is a loss. It is possible to select a special figure variation pattern (reach/loss variation) corresponding to the special figure variation effect in which the stop display is performed.

Furthermore, in the standard time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to losing and no reach, two special symbols corresponding to the special figure variation effect in which the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that indicates a loss after the normal variation are performed are shown. Figure variation patterns (shortening A loss variation, shortening B loss variation) can be selected.

Note that Story Reach is a reach effect that is performed when Reach is established, similar to SP Reach and L Reach, and Story Reach is a video in which a predetermined story is developed, similar to SP Reach and L Reach. (Animation) A background image dedicated to Story Reach is displayed on the entire display section 50a.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 78(B), the special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table further includes a special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table that is associated with the jackpot determination result "Jackpot" and a jackpot determination table. There is a special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the result "small win" and a special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the jackpot determination result "loss".

Each special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is configured such that one type of special figure 2 variation pattern can be selected. In the special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the jackpot, a special figure variation pattern (special jackpot variation) corresponding to the special figure variation performance in which the special performance is executed can be selected. In the special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the small hit, a special figure variation pattern (special small hit variation) corresponding to the special figure variation performance in which the special performance is executed can be selected. In the special time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to losing, it is possible to select a special figure variation pattern (special losing variation) corresponding to the special figure variation performance in which the special performance is executed.

Note that special effects are effects that correspond to the end of an advantageous time-saving state, and special effects are dedicated to special effects consisting of videos (animations) in which a predetermined story unfolds, similar to SP reach, L reach, etc. The background image is displayed on the entire display section 50a. In addition, in the background image dedicated to the special performance, the jackpot determination result is finally suggested by the content of the performance, similar to SP reach, L reach, etc. In addition, in the special symbol variation performance, finally, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a stopped state in a manner that shows the jackpot determination result superimposed on the special performance-dedicated background image.

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which is largely different from the basic embodiment, and processing that is not performed in the basic embodiment will be explained. Note that the processing content described below is an example, and the processing content is not limited thereto.

First, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. A flowchart of the game control side timer interrupt processing according to the third embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 79, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the same steps as in the basic embodiment up to the special operation process (S106) in the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) described in the basic embodiment. . Then, after the special operation process (S106), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a specific area control process as step S107. Note that after the specific area control process (S107), other processes (S107) in the basic embodiment are performed as step S108.

In the specific area control process (S107), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the opening and closing of the specific area 16 in the small winning game based on the gaming state, more specifically, based on whether it is the normal gaming state or the time saving state. In other words, a process for controlling the operation of the distribution member 16k is performed. As will be described later, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "6" when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the special operation status "6" is set, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the opening/closing of the specific area 16 in the specific area control process (S107) based on the starting time of the small winning game. The opening and closing of the specific area 16 (operation of the distribution member 16k) is controlled so that the time chart of the small winning game shown in 75 is realized.

Next, the sensor detection process (S104) will be explained. However, the game control microcomputer 101 executes steps up to step S206 in the sensor detection process (S104) described in the basic embodiment in the same manner as in the basic embodiment. Therefore, the processing after step S206 will be explained. FIGS. 80 and 81 are flowcharts of sensor detection processing according to the third embodiment, and the portions after step S206 are shown in FIGS.

In step S207, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process advances to step S212, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has a predetermined value. Second starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("2" in the third embodiment) corresponding to the prize entered into the second starting hole 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12.

Next, in step S209, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the conditions for executing the second jackpot determination and the special figure 2 variable display (second starting condition) are satisfied. The second starting condition is that none of the special figure variable display, the jackpot game, and the small win game are executed. In other words, the second starting condition consists of the special operation status "1" being set.

If the second starting condition is not satisfied (NO in S209), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S212, and if the second starting condition is satisfied (YES in S209), in step S210, the game control microcomputer 101 selects a special symbol. Random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), loss symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-HS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol fluctuation The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of the pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP) is acquired, and in step S211, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 pending storage section 105b. In this way, in the third embodiment, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b only in a situation where the jackpot determination and special figure variable display regarding the special figure 2 can be started immediately ( Since the special drawing 2 lottery is carried out, the special drawing 2 holding cannot occur as in the basic embodiment.

Subsequently, in step S212, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 11, that is, whether or not a gaming ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S219 when no game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S212), and proceeds to step S219 when a game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (in S212). YES), in step S213, a first starting hole prize ball process is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to game balls. In the first starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("4" in the third embodiment) corresponding to the prize entered into the first starting hole 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11.

Next, in step S214, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is equal to or greater than "4" (upper limit storage number). The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S219 when the number of special drawings 1 pending is "4" or more (YES in S214), and if the number of special drawings 1 holding is not "4" or more (less than) (NO in S214), in step S215, special figure 1 reservation number addition processing is performed. In the special figure 1 pending number addition process, the game control microcomputer 101 adds "1" to the special figure 1 pending number counter, and increases the special figure 1 pending number indicated by the special figure 1 pending display 83a by "1".

Next, in step S216, the game control microcomputer 101 operates the special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), the jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of the special figure fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and in step S217, the acquired special figure A first look-ahead determination process is performed based on the figure related determination information, and in step S218, the acquired special figure 1 related determination information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved special figures 1 in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a. The information is stored and the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a game ball has won in the first big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S223 if a game ball has not won in the first grand prize opening 14 (NO in S219), and if a game ball has won in the first grand prize opening 14 ( (YES in S219), and in step S220, it is determined whether the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter provided in the gaming RAM 104 is "11" or more.

The big prize winning hole winning counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the first big winning hole 14 and the second big winning hole 15 in one round of the jackpot game or one small winning game. . It is assumed that the big winning opening prize counter is cleared by the game control microcomputer 101 when each round of the jackpot game ends or when one small winning game ends. In the third embodiment, the number of prizes allowed to be won in the first big prize opening 14 and the second big prize opening 15 in one round game and one small winning game (AT winning regulation number) is It is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S220 and step S224, which will be described later, are performed.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not less than "11" (YES in S220), the process proceeds to step S223, and if the counter value of the big winning opening winning prize counter is not more than "11", i.e. , if it is less than "11" (NO in S220), in step S221, the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is incremented by "1", and in step S222, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. The first big winning hole prize ball process is performed and the process proceeds to step S223. In addition, in the first grand prize opening prize ball processing, the game control microcomputer 101 inputs the number of prize balls (the third In the embodiment, "15") is added, and a command indicating that a prize has been won in the first major winning opening 14 (first major winning opening winning command) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

In step S223, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a game ball has won in the second big winning hole 15, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S227 if the game ball has not won in the second grand prize opening 15 (NO in S223), and if the game ball has won in the second grand prize opening 15 ( (YES in S223), and in step S224, it is determined whether the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter provided in the gaming RAM 104 is "11" or more.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not less than "11" (YES in S224), the process proceeds to step S227, and if the counter value of the big winning opening winning prize counter is not more than "11", i.e. , if it is less than "11" (NO in S224), in step S225, the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is incremented by "1", and in step S226, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. A second grand prize opening prize ball process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S227. In addition, in the second grand prize opening prize ball processing, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the prize ball counter for the second grand prize opening 15 according to the number of prize balls (the third In the embodiment, "15") is added and a command indicating that a prize has been won in the second major prize opening 15 (second major prize opening winning command) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.
to add.

In step S227, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 16, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 16a. The game control microcomputer 101 finishes the sensor detection process if the game ball has not passed through the specific area 16 (NO in S227), and if the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (YES in S227). In step S228, a specific area passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S229, a specific area passing command indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 16 is set. It is determined whether a passing flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104.

The game control microcomputer 101 finishes the sensor detection process when the specific area passage flag is turned on (YES in S229), and when the specific area passage flag is not turned on (NO in S229), it executes the step In S230, a specific area passing flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S231, it is determined whether the current time saving state is in effect, that is, whether the time saving flag is turned on.

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S231), in step S232, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal V winning flag for gaming, which indicates that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning) in the normal gaming state. A predetermined area of the RAM 104 is turned on to complete the sensor detection process. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 101 is in the time saving state (YES in S231), in step S233, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning) in the time saving state. A predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104 is turned on and the process advances to step S234.

Next, in step S234, the gaming control microcomputer 101 turns off the time saving flag to reset the gaming state, in other words, transitions from the time saving state to the normal gaming state, and in step S235, the gaming state indicating the normal gaming state is A state designation command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and the sensor detection process is completed. In this way, in response to the game ball passing through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the time saving state changes to the normal game state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the game state designation command set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 to the production control board 120 in the output process of step S101. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs the first big prize opening winning command, the second big winning opening winning command, and the specific area passing command set to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to the production control board in the output process of step S101. 120. The production control board 120 (production control microcomputer 121) receives the first grand prize opening winning command, the second grand prize opening winning command, and the specific area passage command, thereby controlling the winning to the first grand prize opening 14, It is recognized that a prize has been entered into the second grand prize opening 15 and that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16.

Next, special operation processing according to the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 82 shows a flowchart of special operation processing according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, in the special operation process according to the third embodiment, the process regarding the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, the first big winning device 14D, and the second big winning device 15D is 6 It is divided into two statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" is assigned to each of these statuses.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Process (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "6", the small winning game is Control processing (S1507) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1" (according to the clearing of the gaming RAM 104).

The small winning game control process (S1507) is a process performed in the small winning game. As will be described later, when a small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed, the game control microcomputer 101 creates a small winning game control table (see FIG. 74) according to the gaming state at that time and the type of the small winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed. is set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and the special operation status "6" is set. Then, when the special operation status "6" is set, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the small win game control process (S1507) based on the small win game control table set as shown in FIG. The opening and closing of the second big prize opening 15 (operation of the second AT opening/closing member 15k) is controlled so that the game time chart is realized.

Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 16, that is, whether or not the specific area passing flag is turned on, when the small winning game ends in the small winning game control process. judge. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16, in order to execute a jackpot game based on the passage to the specific area 16, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the same operation as when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. , performs steps S1762 to S1765 in special symbol confirmation processing to be described later, and turns off the specific area passing flag. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game ball has not passed through the specific area 16, it changes the "special operation status" to "1" in order to enable the next special figure variable display.

Furthermore, the game state setting process (S1506) is a process for shifting to a new game state when the jackpot game ends. When a jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed, the gaming control microcomputer 101 stores a gaming state setting table (see FIG. 76) corresponding to the gaming state at that time and the type of the confirmed jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. set. In addition, as will be described later, when the small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed, the gaming control microcomputer 101 stores the gaming state setting table in the gaming RAM 104 in accordance with the gaming state when passing V and the type of the small winning symbol. Set it in the specified area. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts to a new game state based on the set game state setting table in the game state setting process (S1506). In addition, when the small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the gaming state when the V passes is the normal gaming state when the normal V passing flag is turned on, and sets the time saving V passing flag. is ON, it is determined that the gaming state when V passes was a time saving state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the time-saving flag in the time-saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 when shifting to the time-saving state with the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, at this time, the game control microcomputer 101 defines the duration of the time saving state. In the third embodiment, since the end condition of the time-saving state is configured by the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the specified number of time-savings related to the time-saving state in the gaming RAM 104. Set the remaining time saving counter. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 shifts to the normal gaming state with the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the normal gaming state by not turning on the time saving flag in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, in the game state setting process (S1506), the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the time saving state to be newly transitioned to is an advantageous time saving state or a disadvantageous time saving state, or in other words, the specified number of time saving times in the time saving state is 99 times. or once is set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a flag (advantageous time saving flag) indicating that the time saving state to be transitioned to is an advantageous time saving state when the time saving state to be transferred from now on is an advantageous time saving state; If so, a flag indicating that the game is in a disadvantageous time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving flag) is set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. This is because even in the same time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination table (conditions for determining the special figure variation pattern) referred to in the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state are different.

Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts to a new game state in the game state setting process (S1506), but here, unlike the basic embodiment, the high probability state is not set, so this will be described later. A specific number of times related to the ceiling (800 times in the third embodiment) is set in the ceiling remaining number of times counter. Through this process, the remaining number of executions of the special figure variable display until the ceiling is reached is counted. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the normal V passing flag and the time saving V passing flag in the gaming state setting process (S1506).

Next, special figure 2 determination processing according to the third embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special figure 2 determination process according to the third embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 83, the game control microcomputer 101 first performs a second jackpot determination in step S1620 in the special figure 2 determination process. In the second jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special symbol random number stored in the special symbol 2 reservation storage section 105b, collates it with the second jackpot determination table, and determines whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. Determine whether

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot in step S1621. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1626, and if it determines that it is a jackpot, it selects the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special drawing 2 in step S1622, and in step S1623, it selects the jackpot symbol type determination table. Make a judgment.

In the jackpot symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the jackpot symbol type random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, collates it with the jackpot symbol type determination table, and determines which jackpot symbol type it is. Determine. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the jackpot symbol type determination, in step S1624, it sets symbol data (jackpot symbol data) indicating the jackpot symbol type, which is the determination result, in the special symbol buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1625 At this point, a symbol designation command indicating the jackpot symbol type which is the determination result is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a small win in step S1626. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1631, and if it determines that it is a small hit, it selects the small winning symbol type determination table related to special drawing 2 in step S1627, and in step S1628, Determine the type of small winning symbol.

In the small winning symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the small winning symbol type random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, collates it with the small winning symbol type determination table, and selects which small winning symbol. Determine whether it is the type. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the small winning symbol type determination, in step S1629, it sets symbol data (small winning symbol data) indicating the small winning symbol type that is the determination result in the special symbol buffer of the gaming RAM 104. , In step S1630, a symbol designation command indicating the small winning symbol type, which is the result of the determination, is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and after finishing the special symbol 2 determination process, the process proceeds to the special symbol standby process. return.

In step S1631, the game control microcomputer 101 sets symbol data (losing symbol data) indicating the losing symbol type (losing symbol of special symbol 2) in the special symbol buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1632, sets the symbol data (losing symbol data) indicating the losing symbol type (losing symbol of special symbol 2) into the special symbol buffer of the gaming RAM 104. A symbol designation command indicating (losing symbol of special symbol 2) is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Next, special symbol variation processing according to the third embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of special symbol variation processing according to the third embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 84, in the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610. It is determined whether the variable time has elapsed (special operation counter=0) (S1701). If the game control microcomputer 101 does not end the fluctuating display of the special symbols (NO in S1701), it ends the special symbol fluctuating process, and if it ends the fluctuating display of the special symbols (YES in S1701), the special symbol display At the same time as ending the variable display of the special symbol in step 81, the symbol data (big winning symbol data, small winning symbol data, or losing special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed on the special symbol display 81. A special symbol is stopped and displayed according to (S1702).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a preset special symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special operation timer (S1703), and sets a special symbol to indicate that the variable display of the special symbol will end. A figure fluctuation stop command is set in the output buffer (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and it is determined whether the time saving state (time saving flag is ON) is present (S1706).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1706), it finishes the special symbol variation process, and if it is in the time-saving state (YES in S1706), in step S1707, the stopped-displayed special symbol is set to special symbol 2. Determine whether or not. If it is not the special symbol 2 (NO in S1707), the game control microcomputer 101 finishes the special symbol variation process, and if it is the special symbol 2 (YES in S1707), in step S1708, the value of the time saving remaining counter ( In step S1709, it is determined whether the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0".

If the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter (time saving remaining number of times) is not "0" (NO in S1709), the game control microcomputer 101 finishes the special symbol fluctuation processing and returns the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter (time saving remaining number of times). If is "0" (YES in S1709), in step S1710, the time saving flag is turned OFF to transition to the normal gaming state, and the special symbol variation process is ended. In this way, in response to the completion of the variable display of the special figure 2 for the specified number of times in the time-saving state (time-saving final special figure 2 variation), the time-saving state changes to the normal gaming state.

Next, special symbol confirmation processing according to the third embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special symbol determination process according to the third embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol in step S1751, that is, sets the special operation timer in step S1703. It is determined whether or not the set special figure confirmation time has elapsed (special operation counter = 0).

If the special symbol confirmation time has not elapsed, the game control microcomputer 101 ends the special symbol confirmation process, and if the special symbol confirmation time has elapsed, in step S1752, the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot. Determine whether it is a pattern. If it is a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1762, and if it is not a jackpot symbol, in step S1752, it determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a small win symbol.

If it is a small winning symbol, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1766, and if it is not a small winning symbol, it is determined in step S1754 whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining number counter is greater than "0". The value of the remaining ceiling count counter counts the remaining number of times the special figure variable display can be executed until the ceiling is reached (ceiling remaining count), and is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104.

If the remaining ceiling count is not greater than "0", the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1760, and if the remaining ceiling count is greater than "0", it subtracts "1" from the value of the remaining ceiling count counter in step S1755. Then, in step S1756, it is determined whether the value of the ceiling remaining number counter is "0".

If the remaining number of ceilings is not "0", the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1760, and if the remaining number of ceilings is "0", it determines in step S1757 whether or not the game is currently in the normal gaming state. do. If the gaming control microcomputer 101 is not in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1760; if it is in the normal gaming state, in step S1758, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the time saving flag and sets the ending condition for the time saving state to which the transition is made based on reaching the ceiling. By setting the specified number of time reductions "900" in the remaining time reduction counter, the time reduction state (ceiling time reduction or advantageous time reduction state) where the specified number of time reductions is 900 is made.

Subsequently, in step S1759, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a command indicating that the ceiling has been reached (ceiling specification command) in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and proceeds to step S1760.

In step S1760, the gaming control microcomputer 101 checks whether the time saving flag is ON/OFF, sets a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1761, specifies the special operation status. is changed to "1" and the special symbol confirmation process is ended.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 performs jackpot game preparation processing in step S1762. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first sets a jackpot game control table in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104 according to the type of the small winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed or the type of the jackpot symbol.

Further, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming state setting table in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104 according to the type of the small winning symbol or the type of the jackpot symbol that is being confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state setting table (see FIG. 76) according to the current gaming state and the type of the jackpot symbol that is confirmed and displayed. Set it in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming state setting table in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104 in accordance with the gaming state when the small winning symbol is confirmed and displayed, when the V passes, and the type of the small winning symbol. do. The gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the gaming state when the V passes is the normal gaming state if the normal V passing flag is turned on, and if the time saving V passing flag is turned on, the gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state. It is determined that the gaming state at that time was a time saving state.

The gaming control microcomputer 101 further turns on a jackpot opening flag in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, which indicates that a jackpot game is opening according to the type of small winning symbol or jackpot symbol that is being confirmed and displayed. Furthermore, a jackpot opening command indicating the type of the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 according to the type of the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol. A jackpot opening command corresponding to the type of the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is started.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 resets the value of the ceiling remaining number of times counter in step S1763, and in step S1764, turns off the time saving flag and sets the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter to "0", thereby changing the gaming state. is reset (shifted to the normal gaming state), the special operation status is changed to "4" in step S1765, and the special symbol confirmation process is ended.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a small winning game preparation process in step S1766, changes the special operation status to "6" in step S1767, and ends the special symbol confirmation process.

In addition, in the small winning game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a small winning game control table in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104 according to the current gaming state and the type of the confirmed small winning symbol. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 determines a predetermined opening time (time from the start of the small win game until the first opening of the second big prize opening 15) based on the small win game control table. Set in the special operation timer.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on a small winning opening flag in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, which indicates that a small winning game is opening according to the type of the small winning symbol that is being confirmed and displayed. According to the type of the small winning symbol, an opening command (small winning opening command) indicating the type of the small winning symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of small winning symbol (small winning opening command) indicates that a small winning game (opening of a small winning game) corresponding to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed is started.

Next, a description will be given of the effect regarding the remaining ceiling number of times that the pachinko game machine PY3 can perform. The pachinko game machine PY3 uses the frame lamp 53 during a specific period after power is supplied to perform a performance suggesting the remaining number of ceilings (remaining number of ceilings suggesting performance). Here, the frame lamp 53 will be explained.

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the frame lamp 53 included in the pachinko game machine PY3, and is a front view of the pachinko game machine PY3. The frame lamp 53 is installed on the front frame 23m and can emit light mainly toward the front, so that the light emitted from the frame lamp 53 can be visually recognized from the front. In addition, the gray filled part with the reference numeral 53 in FIG. 86 represents the light emitting part by the frame lamp 53.

The frame lamp 53 includes a left upper light emitting section 53L1, a left upper corner light emitting section 53L2, a left side light emitting section 53L3, a right upper light emitting section 53R1, a right upper corner light emitting section 53R2, and a right side light emitting section 53R3. has. The left upper light emitting section 53L1 is arranged at the upper left side of the front frame 23m, the upper left corner light emitting section 53L2 is arranged at the upper left corner of the front frame 23m, and the left side light emitting section 53L3 is arranged at the left side of the front frame 23m. The upper right light emitting section 53R1 is arranged on the upper right side of the front frame 23m, the upper right corner light emitting section 53R2 is arranged on the upper right corner of the front frame 23m, and the right side light emitting section 53R3 is arranged on the right side of the front frame 23m. It is arranged in

The upper left light emitting section 53L1, the upper left corner light emitting section 53L2, the left side light emitting section 53L3, the upper right light emitting section 53R1, the upper right corner light emitting section 53R2, and the right side light emitting section 53R3 are independently configured into separate systems. The production control microcomputer 121 controls the upper left light emitting section 53L1, the upper left corner light emitting section 53L2, the left side light emitting section 53L3, the upper right light emitting section 53R1, the upper right corner light emitting section 53R2, and the right side light emitting section 53R3. Each can be individually controlled to emit light.

In addition, each of the upper left light emitting section 53L1, the upper left corner light emitting section 53L2, the left side light emitting section 53L3, the upper right light emitting section 53R1, the upper right corner light emitting section 53R2, and the right side light emitting section 53R3 is composed of an LED. It is configured to be able to emit white, yellow, blue, and red light. In addition, the light emitting principle and possible light emission of the left upper light emitting section 53L1, the upper left corner light emitting section 53L2, the left side light emitting section 53L3, the right upper light emitting section 53R1, the upper right corner light emitting section 53R2, and the right side light emitting section 53R3 The color is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

By the way, when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY3, there are two cases: when the RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated and the gaming RAM 104 is cleared, and when the RAM clear switch (not shown) is not operated and the gaming RAM 104 is not cleared. There is a time. When the gaming RAM 104 is cleared, the remaining ceiling number of times is also cleared. The concept of clearing the remaining ceiling number of times here is to reset the remaining ceiling number of times. When the RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated during power supply, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets "800" corresponding to the specific number of times the ceiling is reached to the ceiling remaining counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. By setting this, the remaining ceiling count will be reset. Therefore, when the gaming RAM 104 is cleared, the remaining number of times at the ceiling immediately after power supply in this case becomes the specific number of times (800 times). On the other hand, if the gaming RAM 104 is not cleared, the remaining ceiling counter provided in the gaming RAM 104 will be in the last state when power was being supplied last time, in other words, the state immediately before the power supply was cut off. Become. Therefore, if the gaming RAM 104 is not cleared, the remaining ceiling count is not reset, so the remaining ceiling count immediately after power supply in this case becomes the remaining ceiling count immediately before the previous power supply was cut off. Therefore, for example, if the gaming RAM 104 is cleared when the power supply is cut off when the gaming parlor closes and the electricity is supplied when the gaming parlor opens the next day, the number of remaining ceilings will be set to the specific number (800) as the set value. On the other hand, if the gaming RAM 104 is not cleared, the remaining ceiling count at the time of closing the previous day will be taken over as the remaining ceiling count. As a result, the number of remaining ceilings at the time of store opening varies.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY3 changes the light emitting mode according to the remaining number of times on the ceiling during a period (specific period) from when power is supplied until the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the third embodiment). The frame lamp 53 is made to emit light. Specifically, the pachinko game machine PY3 continues to perform a background light emitting effect (background light emitting effect) while power is being supplied, but during a specific period from the time of power supply, the pachinko gaming machine PY3 A background light emitting effect is performed in a light emitting mode. The background light emitting effect in a light emitting mode according to the remaining number of times on the ceiling constitutes the effect suggesting the number of remaining times on the ceiling.

The performance mode of the background light emission performance includes a normal light emission performance mode that does not constitute a ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance, and a special light emission performance mode that constitutes a ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance. There are 10 types of special light emission modes, ie, a first special light emission mode to a tenth special light emission mode, depending on the number of times remaining on the ceiling. Specifically, the special light emission modes include a first special light emission mode corresponding to a ceiling remaining number of times from 701 to 800, a second special light emission mode corresponding to a ceiling remaining number of times from 601 to 700, and a ceiling light emission mode corresponding to a remaining number of times from 601 to 700. The third special light emission mode corresponds to the remaining number of times from 501 to 600, the fourth special light emission mode corresponds to the number of times remaining to the ceiling from 401 to 500, and the fifth special light emission mode corresponds to the number of times remaining to the ceiling from 301 to 400. A special light emission mode, a 6th special light emission mode that corresponds to a ceiling remaining number of times from 201 to 300, a 7th special light emission mode corresponding to a ceiling remaining number of times 101 to 200, and a ceiling remaining number of times from 51 to 300. An 8th special light emission mode corresponding to 100 times, a 9th special light emission mode corresponding to 11 to 50 times remaining on the ceiling, and a 10th special light emission mode corresponding to 1 to 10 times remaining on the ceiling. There is.

FIG. 87 is a table showing the relationship between the types of special light emission performance modes and their specific performance contents. "Top left", "Top left corner", "Left side", "Top right", "Top right corner", and "Right "Side part" represents the upper left light emitting part 53L1, the upper left corner light emitting part 53L2, the left side light emitting part 53L3, the upper right light emitting part 53R1, the upper right corner light emitting part 53R2, and the right side light emitting part 53R3.

As shown in FIG. 87, the specific effects of the first to tenth special light emission effects are different from each other. However, the specific contents of the first to tenth special light emission effects may be changed as appropriate. Note that although a description of the specific performance content of the normal light emission performance mode is omitted here, the specific performance content of the normal light emission performance mode is different from the specific performance content of each special light emission performance mode.

Next, an example of the control content related to the background light emitting effect in the third embodiment will be explained. Note that the control content described below is an example of the control content related to the background light emission effect, so the control content is not limited to the following content and may be changed as appropriate.

In the third embodiment, similar to the ceiling remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104, a counter for measuring the ceiling remaining number of times (performance side ceiling remaining number counter) is provided in the performance RAM 124. When the production control microcomputer 121 receives the RAM clear notification command or the jackpot opening command, it sets "800", which is the specific number of times the ceiling is reached, in the production side ceiling remaining number counter. After that, when the production control microcomputer 121 receives the special figure variation start command, for example, in the special figure variation production start process (S4306), after determining the special figure variation production pattern, the counter value of the production side ceiling remaining number counter is ``1'' is subtracted from ``1'' to update the remaining ceiling count. In this way, the performance control microcomputer 121 measures the remaining ceiling number of times using the performance side ceiling remaining number of times counter.

Further, upon receiving the power-on command, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the effect-side ceiling remaining number of times counter and starts the background light emitting effect in a special light emitting effect mode corresponding to the remaining number of times on the ceiling. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts the background light emitting effect of the first special light emitting effect mode when the number of times remaining on the ceiling is 701 to 800 times, and when the number of times remaining on the ceiling is 601 to 700 times. , the background light emitting effect of the second special light emitting effect mode is started, and when the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 501 to 600, the background light emitting effect of the third special light emitting effect mode is started, and the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 401. ~500 times, the background light emitting effect of the fourth special light emitting effect mode is started, and when the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 301 to 400 times, the background light emitting effect of the fifth special light emitting effect mode is started. If the remaining number of times on the ceiling is between 201 and 300, the background light emitting effect of the sixth special light emitting effect mode is started, and when the remaining number of times on the ceiling is between 101 and 200 times, the background light emitting effect of the seventh special light emitting effect mode is started. If the background light emitting effect is started and the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 51 to 100, the background light emitting effect of the eighth special light emitting effect mode is started, and if the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 11 to 50, the background light emitting effect is started. The background light emitting effect of the 9th special light emitting effect mode is started, and if the remaining number of ceiling lights is 1 to 10 times, the background light emitting effect of the 10th special light emitting effect mode is started.

Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 121 receives the special symbol variation start command and updates the ceiling remaining number of times during a specific period, and then determines whether it is the timing to switch the special light emission production mode. As mentioned above, the type of special light emission mode is associated with the number of times remaining on the ceiling. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether the remaining number of ceiling lights according to the type of special light emission effect mode at that time has become the number of remaining ceiling lights related to another type of special light emission effect mode.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that it is the timing to switch the special light emission performance mode, it switches to another special light emission performance mode associated with the remaining number of ceiling lights and starts the background light emission performance. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special light emission mode when the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 700, 600, 500, 400, 300, 200, 100, 50, or 10. Determine that it is time to switch.

Then, when the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 700, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts the background light emitting effect of the second special light emitting effect mode, and when the number of times remaining on the ceiling is 600, the third special light emitting effect is started. The background light emitting effect of the light emitting effect mode is started, and when the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 500, the background light emitting effect of the fourth special light emitting effect mode is started, and when the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 400 times, the background light emitting effect is started. If the background light emitting effect of the 5th special light emitting effect mode is started and the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 300, the background light emitting effect of the 6th special light emitting effect mode is started, and if the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 200 times. , if the background light emitting effect of the seventh special light emitting effect mode is started and the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 100, then the background light emitting effect of the eighth special light emitting effect mode is started and if the remaining number of times on the ceiling is 50 times. In this case, the background light emitting effect of the ninth special light emitting effect mode is started, and when the number of times remaining on the ceiling is 10, the background light emitting effect of the tenth special light emitting effect mode is started.

In addition, in the third embodiment, a counter (performance-side specific period remaining number counter) that measures the remaining number of special figure variable displays that can be performed in a specific period in which the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion production can be executed (specific period remaining number of times) is provided. It is provided in the performance RAM 124. When the production control microcomputer 121 receives the power-on command, it sets the production-side specific period remaining count counter to "100", which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display related to the specific period. Then, after that, when the production control microcomputer 121 receives the special symbol variation stop command, for example, in the special symbol variation production end process (S4308), it subtracts "1" from the counter value of the production side specific period remaining number counter, Update the remaining number of times in a specific period. In this way, the performance control microcomputer 121 measures the number of times remaining in the specific period using the performance-side specific period remaining number counter.

Then, in the specific period, after receiving the special figure fluctuation end command and updating the remaining number of times in the specific period, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether it is the timing to end the specific period or not, in other words, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion production. Determine whether it is time to end the process. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 ends the specific period when the remaining number of times in the specific period is 0 (counter value of the specific period remaining number counter = 0). Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 switches the light emission effect mode of the background light emission effect from the special light emission effect mode to the normal light emission effect mode, and starts the background light emission effect based on the normal light emission effect mode.

Furthermore, when the specific period ends, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the image control board 140 to display an image suggesting the remaining ceiling number of times (ceiling remaining number of times suggestion image) at a predetermined position on the display section 50a. Although a detailed description of the display content of the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion image will be omitted, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion image may be set as appropriate within a range that allows the player to recognize the ceiling remaining number of times. Here, "the player can recognize the remaining ceiling number of times" includes being able to directly recognize the remaining ceiling number of times and being able to indirectly recognize the remaining ceiling number of times. In a case where the player can directly recognize the remaining ceiling number of times, the display mode of the remaining ceiling number of times suggestion image is, for example, such that the remaining ceiling number of times suggestion image is composed of numbers representing the remaining number of ceilings. Furthermore, in a case where the player can indirectly recognize the remaining ceiling number of times, the display mode of the remaining ceiling number of times suggestion image is, for example, such that the remaining ceiling number of times suggestion image is composed of characters associated with the range of remaining ceiling number of times. ing. In this case, for example, if the number of times remaining on the ceiling is 701 to 800, character A will be displayed, if the number of times remaining on the ceiling is 601 to 700, character B will be displayed, and if the number of times remaining on the ceiling is 501 to 600, character A will be displayed. Character C is displayed, if the number of remaining ceilings is 401 to 500, character D is displayed, if the remaining number of ceilings is 301 to 400, character E is displayed, and even if the remaining number of ceilings is 201 to 300, character D is displayed. If the number of times remaining on the ceiling is 101 to 200, character G may be displayed, and if the number of times remaining on the ceiling is 1 to 100, character H may be displayed.

In addition, in order to display the ceiling remaining number suggestion image on the image control board 140, the effect control microcomputer 121 sends a command representing the display content of the image (ceiling remaining number suggestion image display command) to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set. The ceiling remaining number suggestion image display command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the ceiling remaining number suggestion image display command, it displays a ceiling remaining number suggestion image that suggests the current ceiling remaining number of times consisting of the display content indicated by the command at a predetermined position on the display unit 50a. to be displayed. Note that the time for displaying the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion image on the display section 50a may be set as appropriate. For example, the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion image may disappear five seconds after it is displayed. Further, the ceiling remaining number suggestion image may be displayed for a certain period of time or until the ceiling is reached, and the display mode of the ceiling remaining number suggestion image may change in accordance with the update of the ceiling remaining number of times during that period. .

In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 hits a jackpot in a specific period, it ends the ceiling remaining number suggestion performance. For example, upon receiving the jackpot opening command, the production control microcomputer 121 switches the light emission mode of the background light emission effect from the special light emission mode to the normal light emission mode, starts the background light emission mode in the normal light emission mode, and Clears the remaining number of times counter for a specific period. In this case, the production control microcomputer 121 does not display the ceiling remaining number suggestion image on the image control board 140.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY3, a jackpot is determined by satisfying the first starting condition (winning a prize in the first starting opening 11 when the number of reserved special drawings 1 is less than the upper limit). There is a first jackpot determination that is performed, and a second jackpot determination that is performed when the second starting condition is satisfied (winning into the second starting opening 12 when the number of reserved special drawings 2 is less than the upper limit). A specific game in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal gaming state without executing a jackpot game advantageous to the player in response to the jackpot determination being executed a specific number of times (800 times) in the normal gaming state. state (time-saving state), and depending on the jackpot determination being performed a specific time-saving stipulated number of times in the specific gaming state (time-saving state), the specific gaming state (time-saving state) may be changed to the normal gaming state, and the game state may be changed to the normal gaming state, and the jackpot judgment When it comes to the result (small win), a small win game is executed, and in response to a predetermined condition being established (the game ball passes through the specific area 16) in the predetermined game (small win game), a specific game state (time saving state) is established. There is a higher probability that a jackpot determination in a normal gaming state will result in a predetermined result (small win) than in a specific gaming state (time saving state). Then, after the jackpot game, a specific game state (time saving state) is entered. As a result, as shown in FIG. 77, the special figure 2 variable display of the specified number of time savings in the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling is more effective than when playing the game by winning the second starting port 12 in the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling. If this is executed, the time-saving state can be generated with a higher probability. Therefore, even if the player reaches the ceiling and enters a time-saving state, it is possible to give the player a thrilling feeling and increase the interest in the game. Furthermore, in the special pattern 2 variable display, the probability that a losing symbol is stopped and displayed is higher than the probability that a losing symbol is not displayed, and the probability that a losing symbol with a time-saving state is stopped and displayed is higher than the probability that a losing symbol is not displayed. Since the probability of FIG. 2 being stopped and displayed is higher than that, the special figure 2 variable display can be continued to be displayed. When the special figure 2 variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in a time saving state based on reaching the ceiling, the time saving state can be substantially continued with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security and improve his/her enjoyment of the game by contrasting it with the shortened time required to reach the ceiling.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY3, the background light emission using the frame lamp 53 (light emitting means) is performed for a specific period after power is supplied, specifically, for a period until the special figure variable display is executed 100 times. Depending on the performance mode of the performance (specific performance), a performance that suggests the remaining number of ceilings (remaining number of times identification information that can be executed before reaching the time saving state (specific game state) without executing the jackpot game) is created. Execute. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko game machine PY3 from decreasing by appropriately indicating to the player the number of times remaining at the ceiling. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY3, when power is supplied, there are times when the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the number of remaining ceilings stored, and when the RAM clear switch is not operated and the number of remaining ceilings stored is cleared. There are times when I maintain the number of times. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp the remaining number of ceilings when power is supplied. As a result, the benefit to the player of the performance suggesting the number of times remaining at the ceiling becomes significant, and the performance effect of the performance suggesting the remaining number of times remaining at the ceiling is improved.

The ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect is composed of a background light emitting effect that can be executed over a plurality of variable display of special figures. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player the remaining number of ceilings without interfering with the preview performance, etc., which is executed on the display section 50a and which suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state.

(Example of modification of third embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

The specified number of times related to reaching the ceiling, the specified number of time reductions related to the time reduction state triggered by reaching the ceiling, the specified number of time reductions related to the time reduction state triggered by the stop display of various small winning symbols, and the stop display of the losing symbol of special drawing 2 The prescribed number of times of time saving related to the time saving state triggered by this is not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate.

Further, there may be a plurality of types of specified times of time saving related to the time saving state when a small winning is won. In this case, the prescribed number of times of time saving may be made different depending on the type of small winning symbol. Further, there may be a plurality of specified times of time saving related to the time saving state in the case of a loss in the special drawing 2. In this case, there are a plurality of types of losing symbols in the special drawing 2, and the specified number of times of time saving may be different depending on the type of losing symbols.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a "loss" is derived in the jackpot determination related to the special figure 2, the time saving state is always entered in accordance with the end of the special figure 2 variable display related to the jackpot determination, but the losing symbol There are one or more losing symbols that cause a transition to a time-saving state, and one or more losing symbols that maintain the gaming state as it is without transitioning to a gaming state different from the normal gaming state, such as a time-saving state. When the "loss" is derived, the type of the losing symbol may be determined by determination, like the small winning symbol type determination or the losing symbol type determination of the second embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, even if a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 while the special figure 2 variable display, small hit game, and jackpot game are being executed, the second jackpot determination and the special figure 2 variable display are not performed. Although the right to execute cannot be reserved, the right to execute the second jackpot determination and the special figure 2 variable display may be reserved with a predetermined number as an upper limit or without an upper limit.

Furthermore, in each jackpot determination, the probability of being determined as a jackpot, the probability of being determined as a small hit, the probability that each jackpot symbol is selected in each jackpot symbol type determination, and the probability that each small win symbol is selected in small win symbol type determination. The probability of occurrence is not limited to that in the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, in the third embodiment, the conditions for executing the jackpot determination regarding the special drawing 1 and the variable display of the special drawing 1 include the first start opening 11 when the number of reserved special drawings 1 is less than the upper limit (4 pieces). Winning a prize is included, and the conditions for executing the jackpot determination related to special drawing 2 and the special drawing 2 variable display include when the special drawing 2 variable display, small winning game, and jackpot game are not being executed. These conditions are not limited to those in the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate.

Further, the structure of the frame lamp 53, in other words, the number of light emitting parts constituting the frame lamp 53 and the position of each light emitting part are not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. In the third embodiment, the background light emitting effect is performed using the frame lamp 53 installed in the front frame 23m, but the light emitting means that can perform the background light emitting effect is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, a light emitting device capable of emitting light may be installed on the game board 1, and a background light emitting effect may be executed by the light emitting device. Furthermore, a background light emitting effect may be performed using the light emitting means installed on the game board 1 and the frame lamp 53.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, there are 10 types of background light emitting effects related to the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion effect, but the number of types is not limited to 10 types and may be changed as appropriate. Further, the relationship between the performance mode of the ceiling remaining number of times suggestion performance and the specific range of the ceiling remaining number of times is not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. Further, the specific value of the range of the number of times remaining at the ceiling is not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate.

7. Inventions Disclosed in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions A to F are disclosed up to the previous paragraph in this [Detailed Description of the Invention]. In the descriptions of Inventions A to E, the names and expressions of corresponding components in the embodiments of the inventions described above, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for inventions A1 to A2 below, invention B is a generic term for inventions B1 to B3 below, invention C is a generic term for inventions C1 to C5 below, and invention D is a generic term for inventions A1 to A2 below. , is a general term for the following inventions D1 to D3.

Furthermore, according to invention A, the effect of improving the interest in gaming is achieved with respect to problem 1 described below regarding the gaming machine described in JP-A No. 2011-172741. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2011-172741, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won on the condition that the game ball enters the starting hole. When a jackpot determination is made, a variable display of identification information (special symbol) to notify the jackpot determination result is performed. When it is announced that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot through the variable display of identification information (special symbols), a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is entered. Then, the time required for the identification information (special symbol) is determined based on the gaming state. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner in order to improve gaming interest. Therefore, the first objective is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Further, according to invention B, the game machine described in JP-A No. 2011-172741 has the effect of improving the interest in playing the game in response to problem 2 described below. In the game machine described in JP-A-2011-172741, the pachinko game machine performs a jackpot determination to determine whether or not it is a jackpot on the condition that the game ball enters the starting hole. When a jackpot determination is made, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify the jackpot determination result. When it is announced that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot through the variable display of special symbols, a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is entered. When a game such as a variable display of special symbols is being played, an effect image is displayed on an image display device or a sound is output from a speaker to improve the game interest. The effect images and sounds include a plurality of constituent elements, and various controls are performed on the effect images and sounds. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that are capable of performing effects made up of a plurality of components in order to improve the game's interest. Therefore, the second problem is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to invention C, the game machine described in JP-A No. 2011-172741 has the effect of improving the interest in the game with respect to problem 3 described below. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2011-172741, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won on the condition that the game ball enters the starting hole. When a jackpot determination is made, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify the jackpot determination result. When it is announced that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot through the variable display of special symbols, a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is entered. Then, when a game such as a variable display of special symbols is being played, there are times when an effect is performed in which the operable movable means is activated. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of performing effects in which actuable movable means are actuated in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, the third problem is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to invention D, the game machine described in JP-A No. 2021-049003 has the effect of improving the interest in the game with respect to problem 4 described below. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-049003, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot on the condition that the game ball enters the starting hole. When a jackpot determination is made, a variable display of identification information (special symbol) to notify the jackpot determination result is performed. When it is announced that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot through the variable display of identification information (special symbols), a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is entered. Then, in the normal gaming state, if the variable display of the identification information (special symbols) is executed a specific number of times, a specific gaming state advantageous to the player may be entered. However, in the normal gaming state, if the variable display of identification information (special symbols) is executed a certain number of times, a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be entered into a gaming machine. There is room for improvement. Therefore, the fourth problem is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Further, according to invention E, there is an effect that the game interest is improved with respect to problem 5 described below regarding the gaming machine described in JP-A-2021-049003. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-049003, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot on the condition that the game ball enters the starting hole. When a jackpot determination is made, a variable display of identification information (special symbol) to notify the jackpot determination result is performed. When it is announced that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot through the variable display of identification information (special symbols), a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is entered. Then, in the normal gaming state, if the variable display of the identification information (special symbols) is executed a specific number of times, a specific gaming state advantageous to the player may be entered. However, in the normal gaming state, if the variable display of identification information (special symbols) is executed a certain number of times, a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be entered into a gaming machine. There is room for improvement. Therefore, problem 5 is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming interest.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to invention A1 is
When a specific result (jackpot symbol) is derived by the variable display of identification information (special symbol), a game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) is provided for executing a specific game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player;
In the normal gaming state, when a predetermined result (losing symbol B) different from the specific result is derived from the variable display of the identification information, the game executing means returns to the normal gaming state without executing the specific game. A gaming machine that sets different specific gaming states,
There are a plurality of categories (Tokuzu Hen P status = "0", Tokuzu Hen P status = "1") as divisions related to the varying time required for the fluctuating display of the identification information,
The game execution means is
Each time the variable display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, switching to a different classification from the current classification among the plurality of classifications;
A gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time is determined based on different conditions (special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) for each combination of the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state and each of the plurality of categories.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to invention A1,
The game ball further includes an operation means (handle 72k) that accepts an operation to launch the game ball toward the game area,
The gaming area is provided with a first starting area (first starting port 11) and a second starting area (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed,
The first starting area and the second starting area are arranged at positions where the game balls can be fired separately by the operating means,
After the specific game, the game execution means may set the second start area to a special game state (second time saving state) in which the second start area is easier to open than the normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific gaming state is closer to the normal gaming state than the special gaming state in terms of ease of opening the second start area.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to invention B1 is
A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) that can set a specific gaming state (jackpot gaming state, high probability state, time saving state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
A performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance using a predetermined performance means,
The performance execution means is a gaming machine that may use the predetermined performance means to execute a suggestive performance (specific preview performance) that suggests that the specific game state may be entered,
The performance execution means uses the predetermined performance means to control a plurality of performance subjects (all characters related to the specific preview performance image G30: character V, character W, character X, and character Y) using the predetermined performance means. The suggestive effect can be executed when the device is activated or output according to the
In the suggested effect, at a first timing, a stop effect (character movement stop effect) that stops the operation or output of the plurality of effect subjects is executed, and at a second timing after the first timing (a specific preview effect image A pre-announcement in advance to notify in advance which of the plurality of production entities will resume operation or output after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the movements of all characters related to G30 stopped. A gaming machine that executes a notification performance (character voice notification performance) and executes a restart performance in which the performance entity that is the target of the advance notification performance resumes operation or output.

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the advance notice performance is executed by the predetermined performance means.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the advance notice performance is executed by a performance means different from the predetermined performance means.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
A game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) that can set a specific gaming state (jackpot gaming state, high probability state, time saving state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
A performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance using a predetermined performance means,
A storage body (frame movable body 56),
The storage body stores a plurality of (four) movable parts (movable parts 56f) that can operate and appear from an invisible standby state to a visible state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the possibility of entering the specific gaming state differs depending on the type of the plurality of movable parts that appear.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The storage body includes a light emitting part (light emitting part 56h),
A gaming machine characterized in that any one of the plurality of movable parts may appear after the light emitting part emits light.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the storage body is touched by a player after the light emitting part emits light, any one of the plurality of movable parts may appear due to the contact.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2 or invention C3,
further comprising a display section,
The performance execution means is
A storage object image (a special mode icon) representing the storage object may be displayed on the display section,
A gaming machine characterized in that the light emitting section may emit light after displaying the storage image.

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to invention C4,
When any of the plurality of movable parts appears, the container image changes to a movable part image (a special mode icon) representing the appeared movable part in accordance with the appearance. Game machine.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
When a specific result (jackpot symbol) is derived by varying the identification information (special symbol), a game execution means (game control microcomputer 101) executes a specific game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player;
A performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance using a performance means including a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
The game executing means is configured to provide a player with more control over the player than in the normal gaming state without executing the specific game in response to the variable display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times (800 times) in the normal gaming state. A gaming machine that can be put into an advantageous specific gaming state (time saving state),
The effect execution means executes the light emission for a predetermined period after power is supplied (a period from the time of power supply until the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the third embodiment): a specific period). Depending on the performance mode of the specific performance (background light emission performance) using the means, the remaining number of times the identification information can be executed until the specific game state is reached without executing the specific game may be indicated. A gaming machine that does.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
The game execution means is
It is possible to store the remaining number of times of the identification information that can be executed before the specific game state is reached without executing the specific game,
A gaming machine characterized in that when power is supplied, there are times when the remaining number of times of the stored identification information is cleared and times when the remaining number of times of the stored identification information is maintained.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance is a background performance that can be executed over a plurality of variable displays of the identification information.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is
Judgment (big hit judgment) is made when the starting condition is satisfied, and when the judgment results in a specific result (big win, small win), a game execution means (that executes a game advantageous to the player (big win game, small win game) Equipped with a game control microcomputer 101),
The starting conditions include a first starting condition (winning in the first starting port 11) and a second starting condition (winning in the second starting port 12),
The determination includes a first determination (first jackpot determination) related to the first starting condition and a second determination (second jackpot determination) related to the second starting condition,
The specific results include a first specific result related to the first determination (jackpot related to special figure 1) and a second specific result related to the second determination (jackpot related to special figure 2),
The game executing means, in response to the determination being executed a predetermined number of times in the normal gaming state, satisfies the second starting condition more than in the normal gaming state without executing a game advantageous to the player. A gaming machine that can be set to a specific gaming state (time saving state) that is easy to play,
The game execution means is
In response to performing the determination a specific prescribed number of times (900 times) in the specific gaming state, changing from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state,
If the determination results in a predetermined result (small win), a predetermined game (small win game) is executed,
In response to a predetermined condition (passage of a game ball passing through a specific area 16) in the predetermined game, the specific game state may be set;
A game characterized in that the specific gaming state is reached with a higher probability when the determination in the normal gaming state yields the predetermined result than when the determination in the specific gaming state yields the predetermined result. Machine.

PY, PY1, PY2, PY3...Pachinko gaming machine 1...Game board 6...Game area 6A...Left gaming area 6B...Right gaming area 11...First starting port 11a...First starting port sensor 12...Second starting port 12a... Second starting opening sensor 12k...Electric chew opening/closing member 13...Gate 14...First big winning opening 14a...First winning opening sensor 14k...First AT opening/closing member 15...Second winning opening 15a...Second big winning opening sensor 15k...Second AT opening/closing member 16...Specific area 16a...Specific area sensor 16k...Distributing member 50...Image display device 50a...Display unit 52...Speaker 53...Frame lamp 56...Frame movable body 56f...Movable part 56h...Light emitting unit 100 ...Game control board 101...Microcomputer for game control 120...Production control board 121...Microcomputer for production control 140...Image control board

Claims (2)

comprising game execution means for executing a specific game advantageous to the player when a specific result is derived from the variable display of the identification information;
In the normal gaming state, when a predetermined result different from the specific result is derived from the variable display of the identification information, the game execution means enters a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state without executing the specific game. A gaming machine that
There are a plurality of categories related to the variation time required to display the variation of the identification information,
The game execution means is
Each time the variable display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state, switching to a different classification from the current classification among the plurality of classifications;
A gaming machine characterized in that the variable time is determined based on different conditions for each combination of the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state and each of the plurality of categories. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The game ball further includes an operation means for receiving an operation for causing the game ball to be launched toward the game area,
The gaming area is provided with a first starting area and a second starting area that can be opened and closed,
The first starting area and the second starting area are arranged at positions where the game balls can be fired separately by the operating means,
The game execution means may set a special game state in which the second starting area is easier to open than the normal game state after the specific game;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific gaming state is closer to the normal gaming state than the special gaming state in terms of ease of opening the second start area.

Images